X3
Owner's Manual for the vehicle
Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control
you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW.
Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐
tains important information on vehicle operation that will help
you make full use of the technical features available in your
BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐
hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
maintaining the value of your BMW.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in
the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
You can find supplementary information in the additional bro‐
chures in the onboard literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable trip.
The Owner's Manual is available in many countries as an app.
Additional information on the Internet:
www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
© 2016 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English ID4 II/16, 03 16 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to
page 254.
6 Information
At a glance
14 Cockpit
18 iDrive
27 Voice activation system
30 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Controls
34 Opening and closing
53 Adjusting
64 Transporting children safely
68 Driving
84 Displays
100 Lights
105 Safety
129 Driving stability control systems
136 Driving comfort
159 Climate control
167 Interior equipment
176 Storage compartments
Driving tips
182 Things to remember when driving
186 Loading
189 Saving fuel
Mobility
198 Refueling
200 Fuel
205 Wheels and tires
217 Engine compartment
220 Engine oil
224 Coolant
226 Maintenance
228 Replacing components
237 Breakdown assistance
243 Care
Reference
250 Technical data
253 Appendix
254 Everything from A to Z
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Information
Using this Owner's Manual
Orientation
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic is by using the index.
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in
the first chapter.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, dif‐
ferences may exist between the printed Own‐
er's Manual and the following Owner's Man‐
uals:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app.
Notes on updates can be found in the appen‐
dix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehi‐
cle.
Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment,
and Communication can be obtained as
printed book from the service center.
The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, and
Communication can also be called up via the
following media:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual on the Control
Display.
▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app.
Additional sources of
information
A dealer’s service center will be glad to answer
additional questions at any time.
Internet
Information on BMW, for example, on technol‐
ogy, is available on the Internet:
www.bmwusa.com.
BMW Driver’s Guide App
The Owner's Manual is available
in many countries as an app. Ad‐
ditional information on the Inter‐
net:
www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide
Symbols and displays
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
Indicates precautions that must be followed
precisely in order to avoid the possibility of
personal injury and serious damage to the
vehicle.
◄ Marks the end of a specific item of
information.
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.
"..." Identifies display texts in vehicle used to
select individual functions.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice
activation system.
››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the
voice activation system.
Action steps
Action steps to be carried out are presented as
numbered list. The steps must be carried out
in the defined order.
1.
First action step.
2. Second action step.
Seite 6
Information
6
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Enumerations
Enumerations without mandatory order or al‐
ternative possibilities are presented as list with
bullet points.
▷ First possibility.
▷ Second possibility.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the
relevant section of this Owner's Manual for
information on a particular part or assembly.
Vehicle features and options
This Owner's Manual describes all models and
all standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series.
Therefore, in this Owner's Manual, we also de‐
scribe and illustrate features that are not avail‐
able in your vehicle, for example, because of
the selected optional features or the country-
specific version.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems.
The respectively applicable country provisions
must be observed when using the respective
features and systems.
For any options and equipment not described
in this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supple‐
mentary Owner's Manuals.
On right-hand drive vehicles, some control ele‐
ments are arranged differently from what is
shown in the illustrations.
Status of the Owner's
Manual
Basic information
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a
policy of constant development that is con‐
ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to
embody the highest quality and safety stand‐
ards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐
scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from
those in your vehicle.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, dif‐
ferences may exist between the printed Own‐
er's Manual and the following Owner's Man‐
uals:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app.
Notes on updates can be found in the appen‐
dix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehi‐
cle.
Own safety
Warranty
Your vehicle is technically configured for the
operating conditions and registration require‐
ments applying in the country of first delivery
also known as homologation. If your vehicle is
to be operated in a different country it might be
necessary to adapt your vehicle to potentially
differing operating conditions and permit re‐
quirements. If your vehicle does not comply
with the homologation requirements in a cer‐
tain country you may not be able to lodge war‐
ranty claims for your vehicle there. Further in‐
formation on warranty is available from a
dealer’s service center.
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern
materials and high-performance electronics,
requires suitable maintenance and repair work.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you entrust corresponding procedures to
a BMW dealer’s service center. If you choose
to use another service facility, BMW recom‐
mends use of a facility that performs work, e.g.
Seite 7
Information
7
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
maintenance and repair, according to BMW
specifications with properly trained personnel,
referred to in this Owner's Manual as "another
qualified service center or repair shop".
If work is performed improperly, e.g. mainte‐
nance and repair, there is a risk of subsequent
damage and related safety risks.
Parts and accessories
BMW recommends the use of parts and ac‐
cessory products approved by BMW.
Approved parts and accessories, and advice
on their use and installation are available from
a BMW dealer's service center.
BMW parts and accessories were tested by
BMW for their safety and suitability in BMW
vehicles.
BMW warrants genuine BMW parts and acces‐
sories.
BMW does not evaluate whether each individ‐
ual product from another manufacturer can be
used with BMW vehicles without presenting a
safety hazard, even if a country-specific official
approval was issued. BMW does not evaluate
whether these products are suitable for BMW
vehicles under all usage conditions.
California Proposition 65 Warning
California laws require us to state the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐
bile components and parts, including compo‐
nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects and reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐
ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐
lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐
pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used
engine oil contains chemicals that have caused
cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect
your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and
water.
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐
lowing warranties:
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War‐
ranty.
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
▷ California Emission Control System Lim‐
ited Warranty.
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating con‐
ditions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to de‐
liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle
is operated under those conditions. If you wish
to operate your vehicle in another country or
region, you may be required to adapt your ve‐
hicle to meet different prevailing operating
conditions and homologation requirements.
You should also be aware of any applicable
warranty limitations or exclusions for such
country or region. In such case, please contact
Customer Relations for further information.
Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the
road safety, operational reliability and the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
ures:
▷ BMW Maintenance system
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models
Seite 8
Information
8
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in seri‐
ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage is
not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Data memory
Many electronic components on your vehicle
are equipped with data memories that tempo‐
rarily or permanently store technical informa‐
tion about the condition of the vehicle, events
and faults. This technical information generally
records the state of a component, a module, a
system or the environment:
▷ Operating mode of system components, fill
levels for instance.
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and from
its individual components, for example,
wheel rotation speed/vehicle speed, decel‐
eration, transverse acceleration.
▷ Malfunctions and faults in important sys‐
tem components, for example, lights and
brakes.
▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐
tions such as airbag deployment or engag‐
ing the stability control system.
▷ Ambient conditions, such as temperature.
This data is purely technical in nature and is
used to detect and correct faults and to opti‐
mize vehicle functions. Motion profiles over
routes traveled cannot be created from this
data. When service offerings are used, for ex‐
ample, repair services, service processes, war‐
ranty claims, quality assurance, this technical
information can be read out from the event and
fault memories by employees of the dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop, including the manufacturer,
using special diagnostic tools. You can obtain
further information there if you need it. After an
error is corrected, the information in the fault
memory is deleted or overwritten on a continu‐
ous basis.
With the vehicle in use there are situations
where you can associate these technical data
with individuals if combined with other infor‐
mation, for example, an accident report, dam‐
age to the vehicle, eye witness accounts —
possibly with the assistance of an expert.
Additional functions that are contractually
agreed with the customer - such as vehicle
emergency locating - you can transmit certain
vehicle data from the vehicle.
Event Data Recorder EDR
This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a
short period of time, typically 30 seconds or
less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
▷ How various systems in your vehicle were
operating.
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were fastened.
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better under‐
standing of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data, e. g., name,
gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.
Seite 9
Information
9
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
ment, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐
quired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐
cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐
hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
Vehicle identification
number
The vehicle identification number can be found
in the engine compartment.
The vehicle identification number can also be
found behind the windshield.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause in‐
jury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis‐
tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of
North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West‐
wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing‐
ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in‐
formation about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
fect Investigations and Recalls, may call the
toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
Seite 10
Information
10
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Seite 11
Information
11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
At a glance
These overviews of buttons, switches and
displays are intended to familiarize you with your
vehicle. Moreover, you will become familiar with
the available control concepts and options
quickly.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Cockpit
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
All around the steering wheel
1 Rear window safety switch 48
2 Power windows 50
3 Exterior mirror operation 61
4 Opening and closing the tail‐
gate 40
5 Unlocking central locking sys‐
tem 40
Locking central locking sys‐
tem 40
6 Lights
Front fog lights 103
Lights off
Daytime running lights 102
Parking lights 100
Low beams 100
Seite 14
At a glance Cockpit
14
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Automatic headlamp con‐
trol 101
Adaptive Light Control 102
High-beam Assistant 102
Instrument lighting 104
7 Steering column stalk, left
Turn signal 75
High beams, head‐
light flasher 75
High-beam Assistant 102
Roadside parking lights 100
Onboard computer 94
8 Steering wheel buttons, left
Cruise control on/off, inter‐
rupt 142
Active Cruise Control on/off, in‐
terrupting 136
Cruise control: store speed
Cruise control: resume speed
Active Cruise Control: reduce
distance
Active Cruise Control: increase
distance
Cruise control rocker switch
9 Instrument cluster 84
10 Steering wheel buttons, right
Entertainment source, see Own‐
er's Manual for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment and Communication 6
Volume, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication 6
Voice activation 27
Telephone, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication 6
Thumbwheel for selection lists 93
11 Steering column stalk, right
Wiper 75
Rain sensor 76
Clean the windshields and head‐
lamps 77
Rear window wiper 77
12 Start/stop the engine and switch
the ignition on/off 69
Auto Start/Stop function 70
13 Horn, total area
14 Steering wheel heating 63
15 Adjust the steering wheel 63
Seite 15
Cockpit At a glance
15
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
16 Unlock hood 217
All around the center console
1 Control Display 18
2 Glove compartment 176
3 Ventilation 165
4 Hazard warning system 237
Intelligent Safety 114
5 Automatic climate control 159
6 Radio/CD/multimedia, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and Commu‐
nication 6
7 Controller with buttons 19
8 Parking brake 72
9 Auto Hold 73
10 PDC Park Distance Control 145
Rearview camera 148
Top View 150
Parking assistant 154
Side View 152
HDC Hill Descent Control 131
11 Driving Dynamics Control 133
12 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 129
Seite 16
At a glance Cockpit
16
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
iDrive
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
The concept
The iDrive combines the functions of many
switches. Thus, these functions can be oper‐
ated from a central location.
WARNING
Operating the integrated information
systems and communication devices while
driving can distract from traffic. It is possible to
lose control of the vehicle. There is risk of an
accident. Only use the systems or devices
when the traffic situation allows. If necessary,
stop and use the systems and devices while
the vehicle is stationary.◀
Overview of control elements
Control elements
1 Control Display
2 Controller with buttons and, depending on
the equipment version, with touchpad
Control Display
Information
▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the
care instructions.
▷ Do not place objects close to the Control
Display; otherwise, the Control Display can
be damaged.
▷ In the case of very high temperatures on
the Control Display, for example due to in‐
tense solar radiation, the brightness may
be reduced down to complete deactiva‐
tion. Once the temperature is reduced, for
example through shadow or climate control
system, the normal functions are re-estab‐
lished.
Switching on
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Press the Controller.
Switching off
1. Press button.
Seite 18
At a glance iDrive
18
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
2. "Turn off control display"
Controller with navigation system
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The Controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the Controller.
1.
Turn.
2. Press.
3. Move in four directions.
Buttons on Controller
Press button Function
MENU Open the main menu.
RADIO Opens the Radio menu.
MEDIA Opens the Multimedia menu.
NAV Opens the Navigation menu.
TEL Opens the phone menu.
BACK Displays the previous display.
OPTION Opens the Options menu.
Controller without navigation system
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The Controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
1.
Turn.
Seite 19
iDrive At a glance
19
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
2. Press.
3. Move in two directions.
Buttons on Controller
Press button Function
MENU Open the main menu.
AUDIO Open audio menu last listened
to, switch between audio me‐
nus.
TEL Opens the phone menu.
BACK Open previous panel.
OPTION Opens the Options menu.
Operating concept
Opening the main menu
Press button.
The main menu is displayed.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the
main menu.
Selecting menu items
Highlighted menu items can be selected.
1.
Turn the Controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
2. Press the Controller.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, for exam‐
ple, "Settings".
Changing between panels
After a menu item is selected, for example,
"Radio", a new panel is displayed. Panels can
overlap.
▷ Move the Controller to the left.
Closes current display and shows previous
display.
Reopens previous display by pressing
BACK button. In this case, the current
panel is not closed.
Seite 20
At a glance iDrive
20
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
▷ Move the Controller to the right.
Opens new display on top of previous
screen.
White arrows pointing to the left or right indi‐
cate that additional panels can be opened.
Opening the Options menu
Press button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
Additional options: move the Controller to the
right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is
displayed.
Options menu
The "Options" menu consists of various areas:
▷ Screen settings, for example, "Split
screen".
▷ Control options for the selected main
menu, for example, for "Radio".
▷ If applicable, further operating options for
the selected menu, for example, "Store
station".
Changing settings
1. Select a field.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐
ting is displayed.
3. Press the Controller.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐
vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item
activates or deactivates the function.
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Touchpad
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the Controller.
Selecting functions
1.
"Settings"
2. "Touchpad"
3. Select the desired function.
▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers.
▷ "Interactive map": viewing the interac‐
tive map.
▷ "Browser": enter Internet addresses.
▷ "Audio feedback": pronounces entered
letters and numbers.
Seite 21
iDrive At a glance
21
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Entering letters and numbers
Entering letters requires some practice at the
beginning. When entering, pay attention to the
following:
▷ The system distinguishes between upper
and lower-case letters and numbers. For
entry, it may be necessary to change be‐
tween upper and lower-case letters, num‐
bers and characters, refer to page 25.
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on
the Control Display.
▷ Always enter associated characters, such
as accents or periods so that the letter can
be clearly recognized. Possible input de‐
pends on the set language. Where neces‐
sary, enter special characters via the Con‐
troller.
▷ To delete a character, slide to the left on
the touchpad.
▷ To enter a blank space, slide to the right in
the center of the touchpad.
▷ To enter a hyphen, slide to the right in the
upper area of the touchpad.
▷ To enter an underscore, swipe to the right
in the lower area of the touchpad.
Using interactive map and Internet
Via touch-pad move the interactive map in the
navigation system and Internet sites.
Function Controls
Move interactive map or
Internet sites.
Swipe into re‐
spective direc‐
tion.
Enlarge/shrink interactive
map or Internet sites.
Drag in or out on
the touchpad with
fingers.
Display the menu or open
a link in the Internet.
Tap once.
Changing settings
You may change Control Display settings, for
example the volume, via touchpad. Swipe left
or right accordingly.
Example: setting the clock
Setting the clock
On the Control Display:
1.
Press button. The main menu is dis‐
played.
2. Turn the Controller until "Settings" is high‐
lighted, and then press the Controller.
3. If necessary, move the Controller to the left
to display "Time/Date".
4. Turn the Controller until "Time/Date" is
highlighted, and then press the Controller.
Seite 22
At a glance iDrive
22
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
5. Turn the Controller until "Time:" is high‐
lighted, and then press the Controller.
6. Turn the Controller to set the hours and
press the Controller.
7. Turn the Controller to set the minutes and
press the Controller.
Additional information
Status field
The following information is displayed in the
status field at the top right:
▷ Time.
▷ Current entertainment source.
▷ Sound output, on/off.
▷ Wireless network reception strength.
▷ Phone status.
▷ Traffic bulletin reception.
Status field symbols
The symbols are grouped as follows:
Radio symbols
Symbol Meaning
HD Radio station is being received.
Satellite radio is switched on.
Telephone symbols
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call.
Missed call.
Wireless network reception
strength.
Symbol flashes: network search.
Wireless network is not available.
Bluetooth is switched on.
Roaming is active.
Text message was received.
Check the SIM card.
SIM card is blocked.
SIM card is missing.
Enter PIN.
Entertainment symbols
Symbol Meaning
CD/DVD player.
Music collection.
Gracenote® database.
AUX-IN port.
USB audio interface.
Mobile phone audio interface.
Additional symbols
Symbol Meaning
Spoken instructions are turned off.
Check the current vehicle position.
Seite 23
iDrive At a glance
23
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Split screen
General information
Additional information can be displayed on the
right side of the split screen, for example, infor‐
mation from the onboard computer.
In the divided screen view, the so-called split
screen, this information remains visible even
when you change to another menu.
Switching the split screen on/off
On the Control Display:
1. Press button.
2. "Split screen"
Selecting the display
On the Control Display:
1. Press button.
2. "Split screen"
3. Move the Controller until the split screen is
selected.
4. Press the Controller or select "Split screen
content".
5. Select the desired menu item.
Programmable memory
buttons
General information
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly, for example, radio stations, navigation
destinations, phone numbers and menu en‐
tries.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Without navigation system and
telephone
Only radio stations can be stored on the but‐
tons, refer to Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication.
Saving a function
1.
Highlight the function via the iDrive.
2.
Press and hold the desired button,
until a signal sounds.
Running a function
Press button.
The function will work immediately.
This means, for example, that the number is di‐
aled when a phone number is selected.
Displaying the button assignment
Touch buttons with bare fingers. Do not wear
gloves or use objects.
The key assignment is displayed at top edge of
screen.
Seite 24
At a glance iDrive
24
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Deleting the button assignments
1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for
approx. 5 seconds.
2. "OK"
Deleting personal in the
vehicle
The concept
Depending on the usage, the vehicle saves
personal data, such as stored radio stations.
These personal data can be permanently de‐
leted through iDrive.
General information
Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐
lowing data can be deleted:
▷ Personal Profile settings.
▷ Stored radio stations.
▷ Stored Favorites buttons.
▷ Travel and onboard computer information.
▷ Music collection.
▷ Navigation, for example stored destina‐
tions.
▷ Phone book.
▷ Online data, for example Favorites, cook‐
ies.
▷ Voice notes.
▷ Login accounts.
▷ RemoteApp smartphone tethering.
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up
to 30 minutes.
Functional requirement
Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Deleting data
Heed and follow the instructions on the Con‐
trol Display.
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. "Settings"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete personal data"
5. "Continue"
6. "OK"
Entering letters and numbers
General information
On the Control Display:
1.
Turn the Controller: select letters or num‐
bers.
2. Select additional letters or numbers if
needed.
3. "OK": confirm the entry.
Symbol Function
Press the Controller: delete the let‐
ter or number.
Press the Controller for an extended
period: delete all letters or numbers.
Switching between cases, letters and
numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering upper and lower case, letters
and numbers:
Seite 25
iDrive At a glance
25
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
or Tip Controller up.
Without navigation system
Select symbol.
Entry comparison
Entering names and addresses: choice is nar‐
rowed down with every letter entered and let‐
ters may be added automatically.
Entries are continuously compared with data
stored in the vehicle.
▷ Only those letters are offered during input
for which data is available.
▷ Destination search: place names can be
entered in all languages that are available
on the Control Display.
Seite 26
At a glance iDrive
26
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Voice activation system
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
The concept
▷ Most functions displayed on the Control
Display can be operated by voice com‐
mands via the voice activation system. The
system supports you with announcements
during input.
▷ Functions that can only be used when the
vehicle is stationary cannot be used via the
voice activation system.
▷ The system uses a special microphone on
the driver's side.
▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's Man‐
ual to use with the voice activation system.
Requirements
Via the Control Display, set a language that is
also supported by the voice activation system
so that the spoken commands can be identi‐
fied.
Set the language, refer to page 97.
Using voice activation
Using the voice activation system
1.
Press button on the steering
wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
A command that is recognized by the voice
activation system is announced and dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐
cates that the voice activation system is active.
If no other commands are available, use func‐
tion via iDrive.
Terminating the voice activation
system
Briefly press the button on the steer‐
ing wheel or ›Cancel‹.
Possible commands
Most menu items on the Control Display can
be voiced as commands.
The available commands depend on the menu
that is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
There are short commands for many functions.
You may select lists such as phone lists via
voice activation. Read these lists out loud ex‐
actly as they show in the respective list.
Having possible commands read aloud
You can have available commands read out
loud for you: ›Voice commands‹.
E.g. if the "Settings" menu is displayed, the
commands for the settings are read out loud.
Seite 27
Voice activation system At a glance
27
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Executing functions using short
commands
Execute functions on the main menu via short
commands. It almost doesn't matter which
menu item is selected, for example, ›Vehicle
status‹.
List of short commands for the voice activation
system, see Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication Owner's Manual.
The list for short commands of the voice acti‐
vation system can be called up via the Inte‐
grated Owner's Manual on the Control Display.
Help dialog for the voice activation
system
Calling up help dialog: ›Help‹.
Additional commands for the help dialog:
▷ ›Help with examples‹: announces informa‐
tion about the current operating options
and the most important commands for
them.
▷ ›Help with voice activation‹: information
about the principle of operation for the
voice activation system is announced.
One example: opening the
tone settings
Via the main menu
The commands of the menu items are spoken
just as they are selected via the Controller.
1.
Turn on the Entertainment sound output if
needed.
2.
Press button on the steering
wheel.
3. ›Radio‹
4. ›Tone‹
Via short command
The desired tone settings can also be started
via a short command.
1. Turn on the Entertainment sound output if
needed.
2.
Press button on the steering
wheel.
3. ›Tone‹
Setting the voice dialog
Set system to standard dialog or use a short
version.
The short version of the voice dialog plays
back short messages in abbreviated form.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech type:"
4. Select setting.
Adjusting the volume
Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐
structions until the desired volume is set.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the profile cur‐
rently used.
Seite 28
At a glance Voice activation system
28
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Information on Emergency
Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐
tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐
tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
This can unnecessarily delay the establish‐
ment of a phone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 237, close to the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
▷ Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐
roof closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
Seite 29
Voice activation system At a glance
29
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Integrated Owner's Manual
in the vehicle
The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐
played on the Control Display. It specifically
describes features and functions found in the
vehicle.
Components of the Integrated
Owner's Manual
The Integrated Owner's Manual consists of
three parts, which offer various levels of infor‐
mation or possible access.
Quick Reference Guide
The Quick Reference Guide provides informa‐
tion how to operate the car, how to use basic
vehicle functions and what to do in case of a
breakdown. This information can also be dis‐
played while driving.
Search by images
Image search provides information and de‐
scriptions. This is helpful when the terminol‐
ogy for a feature is not at hand.
Owner's Manual
Search for information and descriptions by en‐
tering terms selected from the index.
Select components
1.
Press button.
2. Turn the Controller: open "Vehicle info".
3. Press the Controller.
4. Selecting desired range:
▷ "Quick reference"
▷ "Search by pictures"
▷ "Owner's Manual"
Leafing through the Owner's Manual
Page by page with link access
Turn the Controller until the next or previous
page is displayed.
Page by page without link access
Scroll through the pages directly while skip‐
ping the links.
Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press
the Controller to browse from page to page.
Scroll back.
Scroll forward.
Seite 30
At a glance Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
30
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Context help - Owner's Manual to the
temporarily selected function
The relevant information can be displayed di‐
rectly.
Opening via the iDrive
To move directly from the application on the
Control Display to the Options menu:
1.
Press button or move the Controller
to the right repeatedly until the "Options"
menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
Opening when a Check Control
message is displayed
Directly from the Check Control message on
the Control Display:
"Display Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and the
Owner's Manual
To switch from a function, e.g., radio, to the
Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to
alternate between the two displays:
1. Press button or move the Controller
to the right repeatedly until the "Options"
menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4.
Press button again to return to last
displayed function.
5.
Press button to return to the page of
the Owner's Manual displayed last.
To alternate permanently between the last dis‐
played function and the last displayed page of
the Owner's Manual repeat steps 4 & 5. Opens
a new display every time.
Programmable memory buttons
General information
The Owner's Manual can be stored on the Pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly.
Storing
1. "Owner's Manual" Select via the iDrive.
2.
Press selected button for more
than 2 seconds.
Executing
Press button.
The Owner's Manual is displayed im‐
mediately.
Seite 31
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance
31
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Controls
The information in this chapter helps you in
confidently operating your vehicle. All features
and accessories that are useful for driving and
your safety, comfort and convenience are
described here.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Opening and closing
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Remote control/key
General information
The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐
trols with integrated key.
Every remote control holds a replaceable bat‐
tery.
You may set the key functions depending on
the optional features and country-specific ver‐
sion. For Settings, refer to page 46.
The vehicle stores personal settings for every
remote control. Personal Profile, refer to
page 36.
The remote controls hold information on re‐
quired maintenance. Service data in the re‐
mote control, refer to page 226
Overview
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 Unlock the tailgate
4 Press briefly: headlight courtesy delay fea‐
ture
Press and hold: panic mode
Integrated key
Press button, arrow 1, and remove the key, ar‐
row 2.
The driver's door can be unlocked and locked
without remote control, refer to page 39, us‐
ing the integrated key.
The integrated key can also be used for the
glove compartment on the front passenger
side.
Seite 34
Controls Opening and closing
34
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Replacing the battery
1. Remove integrated key from remote con‐
trol.
2. Place the integrated key underneath the
battery compartment cover, arrow 1, and
lift the cover with a lever movement of the
integrated key.
3. Remove battery compartment cover, ar‐
row 2.
4. Insert a battery of the same type with the
positive side facing up.
5. Press the cover closed.
Have old batteries disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop
or take them to a collection point.
New remote controls
New remote controls are available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Loss of the remote controls
The lost remote control can be blocked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Emergency detection of remote
control
The concept
The engine can be started via emergency de‐
tection of the remote control, if the remote
control is not recognized by the vehicle.
General information
A Check Control message is displayed.
Remote control detection by the vehicle can
among others be malfunctioning under the fol‐
lowing circumstances:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replace the battery, refer to
page 35.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment
with high transmit power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity.
▷ Interference of radio transmission by a
charging process of mobile devices, e.g.,
charging of a mobile phone.
Starting the engine
1.
Hold the remote control with its back
against the marked area on the steering
column.
2. Start the engine within 10 seconds.
If the remote control is not detected, slightly
change the position of the remote control and
repeat the procedure.
Seite 35
Opening and closing Controls
35
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Personal Profile
The concept
Using Personal Profile, individual settings for
several drivers can be saved and called up
again at a later time.
General information
There are three profiles with which personal
vehicle settings can be stored. Every remote
control has one of these profiles assigned.
If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote con‐
trol, the assigned personal profile will be acti‐
vated. All settings stored in the profile are au‐
tomatically applied.
If several drivers use their own remote control,
the vehicle will adjust the personal settings
during unlocking. These settings are also re‐
stored, if the vehicle has been used in the
meantime by a person with a different remote
control.
Changes to the settings are automatically
saved in the profile currently activated.
If another profile is selected via iDrive, the set‐
tings saved in it will be applied automatically.
The new profile is assigned to the remote con‐
trol currently used.
There is an additional guest profile available
that is not assigned to any remote control: It
can be used to apply settings in the vehicle
without changing the personal profiles.
Adjusting
The settings for the following systems and
functions are saved in the active profile. The
scope of storable settings is country- and
equipment-dependable.
▷ Unlocking and locking.
▷ Lights.
▷ Climate control.
▷ Radio.
▷ Instrument cluster.
▷ Programmable memory buttons.
▷ Volumes, tone.
▷ Control Display.
▷ Navigation.
▷ Park Distance Control PDC.
▷ Rearview camera.
▷ Side View.
▷ Top View.
▷ Head-up Display.
▷ Driving Dynamics Control.
▷ Driver's seat position, exterior mirror posi‐
tion, steering wheel position.
▷ Intelligent Safety.
▷ Active Blind Spot Detection.
Profile management
Opening profiles
Regardless of the remote control in use a dif‐
ferent profile may be activated.
About iDrive:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. Select a profile.
▷ All settings stored in the called-up profile
are automatically applied.
▷ The called-up profile is assigned to the re‐
mote control being used at the time.
▷ If the profile is already assigned to a differ‐
ent remote control, this profile will apply to
both remote controls. It cannot be differen‐
tiated anymore between the settings for
the two remote controls.
Renaming profiles
A personal name can be assigned to every pro‐
file to avoid confusion between the profiles.
Seite 36
Controls Opening and closing
36
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Rename current profile"
Resetting profiles
The settings of the active profile are reset to
their default values.
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Reset current profile"
Exporting profiles
Most settings of the active profile can be ex‐
ported.
This can be helpful for securing and retrieving
personal settings, before delivering the vehicle
to a workshop, for example. Profiles can be
taken to another vehicle equipped with the
Personal Profile function.
The following export options are available:
▷ Via BMW Online.
▷ Via the USB port to a USB device.
Popular file systems for USB devices are
supported. FAT32 and exFAT are the rec‐
ommended formats for profile export.
Other formats may not support the export.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. "Export profile"
4. BMW Online: "BMW Online"
USB interface: "USB device"
Importing profiles
Profiles exported via BMW Online can also be
imported via BMW Online.
Profiles stored on a USB device can be im‐
ported via the USB interface.
Existing settings are overwritten with the im‐
ported profile.
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. "Import profile"
4. BMW Online: "BMW Online"
USB interface: "USB device"
Using the guest profile
The guest profile is for individual settings that
are saved in none of the three personal pro‐
files.
This can be useful for drivers who are using
the vehicle temporarily and do not have their
own profile.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. "Guest"
The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not
assigned to the current remote control.
Display profile list during start
The profile list can be displayed during each
start to select the desired profile.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display user list at startup"
Seite 37
Opening and closing Controls
37
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Using the remote control
Information
WARNING
People or animals in the vehicle can lock
the doors from the inside and lock themselves
in. The vehicle can then not be opened from
the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the
remote control along so that the vehicle can be
opened from the outside.◀
Unlocking
Press button on the remote control.
Depending on the settings, refer to page 46,
the following access points are unlocked.
▷ Driver's door and fuel filler flap.
▷ All doors, tailgate, and fuel filler flap.
In addition, the following functions are exe‐
cuted:
▷ The interior lights are switched on, when it
is dark outside, the courtesy lamps are also
switched on. This function is not available,
if the interior lamps were switched off man‐
ually.
▷ The welcome lamps are switched on, if this
function was activated.
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 47, is
switched off.
Convenient opening
Press and hold this button on the re‐
mote control after unlocking.
The windows and the glass sunroof are
opened, as long as the button on the remote
control is pressed.
Locking
WARNING
Unlocking from the inside is only possi‐
ble with special knowledge.
If people must spend a longer time in the vehi‐
cle while it is very hot or cold outside, there is a
risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not lock the
vehicle from the outside when there are people
in it.◀
The driver's door must be closed.
Press button on the remote control.
All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap are
being locked.
The alarm system, refer to page 47, is
switched on.
Switching on interior lights and
courtesy lights
Press button on the remote control with
the vehicle locked.
The courtesy lamps are only switched on when
it is dark outside. This function is not available,
if the interior lamps were switched off man‐
ually.
If the button is pressed again within 10 sec‐
onds after vehicle was locked, the interior mo‐
tion sensor and tilt alarm sensor of the anti-
theft warning system, refer to page 48, are
turned off. After locking, wait 10 seconds be‐
fore pressing the button again.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press button on the remote control for
at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Unlocking the tailgate
With automatic tailgate operation:
To avoid locking it into the vehicle, do not
place the remote control in the cargo area.
Press button on the remote control for
approx. 1 second.
Seite 38
Controls Opening and closing
38
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
The tailgate opens slightly, regardless of
whether the vehicle was previously locked or
unlocked.
With automatic tailgate operation, the closed
tailgate is automatically opened.
Depending on the features and the country
version, it is also possible to have door un‐
locked. Create the settings, refer to page 46.
If the doors were not unlocked, the tailgate is
locked again as soon as it closes. Take the re‐
mote control with you and do not leave it in the
cargo area; otherwise, the remote control is
locked inside the vehicle when the tailgate is
closed.
CAUTION
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit
the rear window and heat conductors while
driving. There is a risk of property damage.
Cover the edges and ensure that pointed ob‐
jects do not hit the rear window.◀
Switching on the headlight courtesy
delay feature
Briefly press the button on the remote
control.
The duration can be set in the Control Display.
Malfunction
Remote control detection by the vehicle can
among others be malfunctioning under the fol‐
lowing circumstances:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replace the battery, refer to
page 35.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment
with high transmit power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity.
Do not transport the remote control together
with metal objects or electronic devices.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also
be unlocked and locked from the outside with‐
out remote control, refer to page 39.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
▷ LX8766S.
▷ LX8766E.
▷ LX8CAS.
▷ LX8CAS2.
▷ MYTCAS4.
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐
ference, and
▷ this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Without remote control
From the outside
WARNING
Unlocking from the inside is only possi‐
ble with special knowledge.
Seite 39
Opening and closing Controls
39
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
If people must spend a longer time in the vehi‐
cle while it is very hot or cold outside, there is a
risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not lock the
vehicle from the outside when there are people
in it.◀
ATTENTION
The door lock is permanently joined with
the door. The door handle can be moved.
When pulling the door handle with the inte‐
grated key inserted, paint or key can be dam‐
aged. There is a risk of damage to property.
Remove the integrated key before pulling the
outside door handle.◀
Unlock or lock the driver's door via the door
lock using the integrated key, refer to page 34.
The other doors must be unlocked or locked
from the inside.
Alarm system
The alarm system is not armed if the vehicle is
locked with the integrated key.
The alarm system is triggered when the door is
opened, if the vehicle was unlocked via the
door lock.
In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle
with the remote control or switch on the igni‐
tion, if needed, through emergency detection
of the remote control, refer to page 35.
From the inside
Unlocking and locking
Via the buttons for the central locking system.
▷
By pressing the button, the vehicle
is locked with the doors closed.
▷
Pressing the button unlocks the
vehicle.
The vehicle is not secured against theft when
locking.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is
automatically unlocked. The hazard warning
system and interior lights come on.
Unlocking and opening
▷ Press the central locking system
button to unlock the doors to‐
gether, and then pull the door handle
above the armrest.
▷ On the door to be opened, pull the door
handle twice: the first time unlocks the
door, the second time opens it. The other
doors remain locked.
Tailgate
Information
To avoid locking it into the vehicle, do not
place the remote control in the cargo area.
Seite 40
Controls Opening and closing
40
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injuries. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
Opening
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens.
Ensure that adequate clearance is available
before opening.
Opening from the outside
▷ Press button next to the tailgate.
▷ Press button on the remote con‐
trol for approx. 1 second.
Depending on the country version and the
settings, the doors are unlocked as well.
The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung up‐
ward.
Closing
Information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injuries. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
CAUTION
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit
the rear window and heat conductors while
driving. There is a risk of property damage.
Cover the edges and ensure that pointed ob‐
jects do not hit the rear window.◀
Closing
Recessed grips on the inside trim of the tail‐
gate can be used to conveniently pull down the
tailgate.
Automatic tailgate operation
Adjusting the opening height
You can set how far the tailgate should open.
CAUTION
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is a risk of property damage.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
When adjusting the opening height, ensure
that there is a clearance of at least 4 in‐
ches/10 cm above the tailgate.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Tailgate"
3. Turn the Controller until the desired open‐
ing height is selected.
4. Press the Controller.
Seite 41
Opening and closing Controls
41
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Opening
CAUTION
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is a risk of property damage.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
▷ Press button on tailgate's exterior.
▷ Press button on the remote con‐
trol for approx. 1 second.
Depending on the country version and the
settings, the doors are unlocked as well.
▷ Press button in the driver's door.
If the vehicle is stationary, the tailgate opens
automatically to the adjusted opening height.
The opening procedure is interrupted:
▷ By pressing a button again.
▷ When starting the engine.
▷ When the vehicle starts moving.
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
tailgate.
Closing
CAUTION
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit
the rear window and heat conductors while
driving. There is a risk of property damage.
Cover the edges and ensure that pointed ob‐
jects do not hit the rear window.◀
To avoid locking it into the vehicle, do not
place the remote control in the cargo area.
Without Comfort Access:
▷ Press button on the inside of the tailgate.
Pressing the button again stops the mo‐
tion.
With Comfort Access:
▷ Press button, arrow 1, on the inside of the
tailgate.
Pressing the button again stops the mo‐
tion.
▷ Press button, arrow 2.
The vehicle will be locked after closing the
tailgate. The driver's door must be closed
for this purpose and the remote control
must be outside of the vehicle in the area
of the tailgate.
Pressing the button again stops the mo‐
tion.
Seite 42
Controls Opening and closing
42
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
▷ Press button on tailgate's exterior.
Pressing the button again stops the mo‐
tion.
▷ Pull and hold the button in the driver
door. Releasing the button stops
window/roof movement.
The remote control must be located in the
interior for this function.
An acoustic signal sounds and the tailgate
closes.
The closing operation is interrupted:
▷ When starting the engine.
▷ The vehicle starts off with jerks.
Manual operation
WARNING
With manual operation of a blocked tail‐
gate, it can loosen itself unexpectedly from the
blockage. There is a risk of injuries or a risk of
property damage. Do not operate the tailgate
manually if it is blocked. Have it checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.◀
In the event of an electrical malfunction, oper‐
ate the unlocked tailgate manually with a slow
and smooth motion.
Comfort Access
The concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activat‐
ing the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote con‐
trol with you, such as in your pants pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is in close proximity or in the
car's interior.
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.
▷ Convenient closing.
▷ Separate unlocking of the tailgate.
▷ Open/close tailgate with no-touch activa‐
tion.
Information
To avoid locking it into the vehicle, do not
place the remote control in the cargo area.
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injuries. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
Functional requirements
▷ There are no external sources of interfer‐
ence nearby.
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control
must be located outside of the vehicle near
the doors.
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
▷ The engine can only be started if the re‐
mote control is in the vehicle.
Seite 43
Opening and closing Controls
43
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Unlocking
Grasp the door handle on the driver's or front
passenger door completely, arrow.
This corresponds with pressing the button
on the remote control.
Locking
Touch the surface on the door handle of the
driver's or front passenger door, arrow, with
your finger for approx. 1 second without grasp‐
ing the door handle.
This corresponds with pressing the button
on the remote control.
To save battery power, ensure that the ignition
and all power consumers are deactivated be‐
fore locking the vehicle.
Convenient closing
WARNING
With convenient closing, body parts can
be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that the area of movement of the doors is clear
during convenient closing.◀
Touch the surface on the door handle of the
driver's or front passenger door, arrow, with
your finger and hold it there without grasping
the door handle.
This corresponds with pressing and holding
the button
on the remote control.
In addition to locking, the windows and the
glass sunroof close and the exterior mirrors
fold in.
Unlocking the tailgate separately
Press button on tailgate's exterior.
This corresponds with pressing the button
on the remote control.
The situation of the doors does not change.
Take the remote control with you and do not
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐
mote control is locked inside the vehicle when
the tailgate is closed.
CAUTION
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is a risk of property damage.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
Opening and closing the tailgate with
no-touch activation
General information
The tailgate can be opened with no-touch acti‐
vation using the remote control you are carry‐
ing. With automatic tailgate operation, it can
also be closed with no-touch activation. Two
sensors detect a forward-directed foot motion
Seite 44
Controls Opening and closing
44
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
in the center of the area at the rear of the car
and the tailgate opens and/or closes.
Foot movement to be carried out
WARNING
During no-touch activation, vehicle parts
may be touched, e.g., hot exhaust system.
There is a a risk of injury. When moving your
foot, make sure you have a firm stance and do
not touch the vehicle.◀
1. Place in the center behind the vehicle,
about an arm's length from the vehicle rear.
2. Move a foot in the direction of travel as far
under the vehicle as possible and immedi‐
ately pull it back. With this movement, the
leg must pass through the ranges of both
sensors.
Opening
Perform the foot movement described earlier.
The tailgate opens, regardless of whether it
was previously locked or unlocked.
Before the opening, the hazard warning sys‐
tem flashes.
If the remote control is in the sensor area, the
tailgate can be closed inadvertently by an un‐
conscious or alleged recognized foot move‐
ment.
The sensor range reaches approx. 5 ft/1.50 m
behind the area at the rear of the car.
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injuries. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
CAUTION
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is a risk of property damage.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
Closing
Perform the foot movement described earlier.
The hazard warning system flashes on and an
acoustic signal sounds before the tailgate
closes.
The closing of the tailgate has no effect on the
locking of the vehicle.
To avoid locking it into the vehicle, do not
place the remote control in the cargo area.
Another foot movement can interrupt the clos‐
ing operation.
If the remote control is in the sensor area, the
tailgate can be closed inadvertently by an un‐
conscious or alleged recognized foot move‐
ment.
The sensor range reaches approx. 5 ft/1.50 m
behind the area at the rear of the car.
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injuries. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
CAUTION
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is a risk of property damage.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
Seite 45
Opening and closing Controls
45
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Malfunction
Remote control detection by the vehicle can
among others be malfunctioning under the fol‐
lowing circumstances:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replace the battery, refer to
page 35.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment
with high transmit power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity.
Do not transport the remote control together
with metal objects or electronic devices.
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock
the vehicle using the buttons of the remote
control or using the integrated key, refer to
page 34.
Adjusting
Unlocking
The settings are saved in the active profile, re‐
fer to page 36.
Doors
1.
"Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. Select the symbol.
4. Select the desired function:
▷ "Driver's door only"
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐
locks the entire vehicle.
▷ "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Tailgate
Depending on optional features and country
version, this setting is not offered in some
cases.
1. "Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. Select the symbol.
4. Select the desired function:
▷ "Tailgate"
Depending on your vehicle's optional
features, the tailgate is either unlocked
or opened.
▷ "Tailgate + door(s)"
Depending on your vehicle's optional
features, the tailgate is either unlocked
or opened and the doors unlocked.
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
The settings are saved in the active profile, re‐
fer to page 36.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. Deactivate or activate the desired confir‐
mation signals.
▷ With alarm system:
"Acoustic sig. lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by one honk of
the horn.
▷ "Flash when lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by two flashes,
locking by one.
Automatic locking
The settings are saved in the active profile, re‐
fer to page 36.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. Select the desired function:
▷ "Lock if no door is opened"
Seite 46
Controls Opening and closing
46
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
The vehicle locks automatically after a
short period of time if no door is
opened after unlocking.
▷ "Lock after start driving"
The vehicle locks automatically after
you drive off.
Retrieving the seat and mirror settings
The driver's seat and exterior mirror positions
used last are stored for the remote control cur‐
rently used.
When the vehicle is unlocked, these positions
are automatically retrieved if this function was
activated.
WARNING
There is risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
The adjustment procedure is interrupted:
▷ When a seat position switch is pressed.
▷ When a button of the seat and mirror mem‐
ory is pressed.
Activating the setting
1.
"Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. "Last seat position autom."
Alarm system
The concept
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm
system responds to:
▷ Opening a door, the hood or the tailgate.
▷ Movements in the interior.
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during at‐
tempts at stealing a wheel or when towing
the car.
▷ Disconnected battery voltage.
The alarm system briefly signals tampering:
▷ Acoustic alarm.
▷ By switching on the hazard warning sys‐
tem.
▷ By flashing the daytime running lights.
Switching on and off
When you unlock or lock the vehicle, either
with the remote control or with Comfort Ac‐
cess, the alarm system is switched on and off
at the same time.
Door lock with the alarm system
switched on
The alarm system is triggered when the door is
opened, when the vehicle is unlocked via the
door lock.
Switching off the alarm, refer to page 48.
Tailgate with the alarm system
switched on
The tailgate can be opened even when the
alarm system is switched on.
After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and
monitored again when the doors are locked.
The hazard warning system flashes once.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press button on the remote control for
at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Seite 47
Opening and closing Controls
47
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Indicator lamp on the interior mirror
▷ The indicator lamp flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
The alarm system is switched on.
▷ Indicator lamp flashes for approx. 10 sec‐
onds, then it flashes briefly every 2 sec‐
onds:
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor
are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate
are not correctly closed. Correctly closed
access points are secured.
When the still open access points are
closed, interior motion sensor and tilt alarm
sensor will be switched on.
▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlock‐
ing:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until the engine ignition is switched on, but
no longer than approx. 5 minutes:
An alarm has been triggered.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations such
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the car is
towed.
Interior motion sensor
The windows and glass sunroof must be
closed for the system to function properly.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor can be switched off together, such as in
the following situations:
▷ In automatic car washes.
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on trains carrying vehi‐
cles, at sea or on a trailer.
▷ With animals in the vehicle.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press the remote control button again
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle
is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
onds and then continues to flash.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor are turned off until the vehicle is locked
again.
Switching off the alarm
▷ Unlock vehicle with the remote control or
switch on the ignition, if needed through
emergency detection of remote control, re‐
fer to page 35.
▷ With Comfort Access: if you are carrying
the remote control on your person, grasp
the driver side or front passenger side door
handle completely.
Power windows
Information
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
Seite 48
Controls Opening and closing
48
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Overview
Power windows
Safety switch
Opening
▷
Press the button to the resistance
point.
The window opens while the switch is held.
▷
Press the switch beyond the resist‐
ance point.
The window opens automatically. Pressing
the switch again stops the motion.
See also: Convenient opening, refer to
page 38, via remote control.
Closing
WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of
injury or risk of property damage. Make sure
that the area of movement of the windows is
clear during opening and closing.◀
▷
Pull the switch to the resistance
point.
The window closes while the switch is
held.
▷
Pull the switch beyond the resistance
point.
The window closes automatically. Pulling
again stops the motion.
See also: closing by means of Comfort Access,
refer to page 43.
Pinch protection system
WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of
injury or risk of property damage. Make sure
that the area of movement of the windows is
clear during opening and closing.◀
WARNING
Accessories on the windows such as an‐
tennas can impact jam protection. There is a
risk of injury. Do not install accessories in the
area of movement of the windows.◀
If closing force exceeds a specific threshold as
a window closes, closing is interrupted.
The window reopens slightly.
Seite 49
Opening and closing Controls
49
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Closing without the pinch protection
system
WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of
injury or risk of property damage. Make sure
that the area of movement of the windows is
clear during opening and closing.◀
In case of danger from the outside or if ice
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol‐
lows:
1. Pull the switch past the resistance point
and hold it there.
The pinch protection is limited and the
window opens slightly if the closing force
exceeds a certain threshold.
2. Pull the switch past the resistance point
again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
there.
The window closes without jam protection.
Safety switch
General information
The safety switch in the driver's door can be
used to prevent children, for example, from
opening and closing the rear windows using
the switches in the rear.
Information
WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of
injury or risk of property damage. Make sure
that the area of movement of the windows is
clear during opening and closing.◀
In order to prevent uncontrolled closing of the
windows, press the safety switch, for example
if children or animals are carried in the rear.
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the
safety function is switched off automatically.
Switching on and off
Press button.
The LED lights up if the safety func‐
tion is switched on.
Roller sunblinds
Roller sunblinds for the rear side
windows
Pull out the roller sunblind at the loop and hook
it onto the bracket.
WARNING
With closed roller sunblinds and open
windows, the roller sunblinds can be loaded
heavily while driving due to the wind. The roller
sunblinds can be damaged and compromise
the passengers. There is a risk of injuries. Do
not open the windows while driving if the roller
sunblinds are closed.◀
Panoramic glass sunroof
General information
The glass sunroof and the sliding visor can be
operated together or separately, using the
same switch.
The glass sunroof is operational when the igni‐
tion is switched on.
Seite 50
Controls Opening and closing
50
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
glass sunroof is clear during opening and clos‐
ing.◀
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Tilting up and closing tilted glass
sunroof
Push switch briefly upward.
▷ The closed glass sunroof is
tilted and the sliding visor
opens slightly.
▷ The opened glass sunroof
closes until it is in its tilted
position. The sliding visor
does not move.
▷ The tilted glass sunroof is being closed.
The sliding visor does not move.
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and
sliding visor separately
▷ Press the switch in the de‐
sired direction to the resist‐
ance point and hold it there.
The sliding visor opens, as
long as the switch is held
down. If the sliding visor is
already fully open, the glass
sunroof opens.
The glass sunroof closes as
long as the switch is held
down. If the glass sunroof is
already closed or in the tilted
position, the sliding visor
closes.
▷ Press the switch in the desired direction
past the resistance point.
The sliding visor opens automatically. If the
sliding visor is already fully open, the glass
sunroof opens automatically.
The glass sunroof closes automatically. If
the glass sunroof is already closed or in the
tilted position, the sliding visor closes au‐
tomatically.
Pressing the switch upward stops the mo‐
tion.
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and
sliding visor together
Briefly press the switch twice in
succession in the desired direc‐
tion past the resistance point.
The glass sunroof and sliding vi‐
sor move together. Pressing the
switch upward stops the motion.
▷ See also: Convenient opening, refer to
page 38, via remote control.
▷ See also: closing by means of Comfort Ac‐
cess, refer to page 43.
Seite 51
Opening and closing Controls
51
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Comfort position
If the glass sunroof is not automatically com‐
pletely opened, the comfort position has been
attained. In this position the wind noises in the
interior are the least.
If desired, continue the movement by Pressing
the switch.
Pinch protection system
If the closing force when closing the glass sun‐
roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move‐
ment is stopped, beginning at approximately
the middle of the opening in the roof, or from
the tilted position during closing. The glass
sunroof reopens slightly.
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
glass sunroof is clear during opening and clos‐
ing.◀
Closing from the open position
without pinch protection
If there is an external danger, proceed as fol‐
lows:
1.
Press the switch forward past the resist‐
ance point and hold.
The pinch protection is limited and the
glass sunroof reopens slightly if the closing
force exceeds a certain margin.
2. Press the switch forward again past the re‐
sistance point and hold until the glass sun‐
roof closes without jam protection. Make
sure that the closing area is clear.
Closing from the raised position
without pinch protection
If there is an external danger, push the switch
forward past the resistance point and hold it.
The glass sunroof closes without jam protec‐
tion.
Initializing after a power failure
After a power failure during the opening or
closing process, the glass sunroof can only be
operated to a limited extent.
Initializing the system
The system can be initialized when the vehicle
is stationary and the engine is running.
During the initialization, the glass sunroof
closes without jam protection.
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
glass sunroof is clear during opening and clos‐
ing.◀
Press the switch up and hold it
until the initialization is com‐
plete:
▷ Initialization begins within
15 seconds and is com‐
pleted when the glass sun‐
roof and sliding visor are
completely closed.
▷ The glass sunroof closes without jam pro‐
tection.
Seite 52
Controls Opening and closing
52
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Adjusting
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Sitting safely
The ideal seating position meeting the needs
of the occupants can make a vital contribution
to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
The seating position plays an important role in
an accident in combination with:
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 56.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 58.
▷ Airbags.
Seats
Information
WARNING
Seat adjustments while driving can lead
to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehicle
control could be lost. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Only adjust the seat on the driver's side
when the vehicle is stationary.◀
WARNING
With a backrest inclined too far to the
rear, the protective effect of the safety belt
cannot be ensured anymore. There is a danger
of sliding under the safety belt in an accident.
There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Adjust
the seat prior to starting the trip. Adjust the
backrest so that it is in the most upright posi‐
tion as possible and do not adjust again while
driving.◀
WARNING
There is risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
Manually adjustable seats
Overview
1 Forward/backward
2 Thigh support
3 Seat tilt
4 Backrest width
5 Lumbar support
6 Height
7 Backrest tilt
Seite 53
Adjusting Controls
53
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Forward/backward
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired
direction.
After releasing the lever, move the seat for‐
ward or back slightly making sure it engages
properly.
Height
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat
or lift it off, as necessary.
Backrest tilt
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the
backrest or lift it off, as necessary.
Seat tilt
Pull the lever and move the seat to the desired
tilt. After releasing the lever, apply your weight
to the seat or lift it off to make sure the seat
engages properly.
Electrically adjustable seats
Overview
1 Seat and mirror memory
2 Backrest width
3 Lumbar support
4 Backrest tilt
5 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
General information
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored
for the profile currently used. When the vehicle
is unlocked via the remote control, the position
is automatically retrieved if the Function is acti‐
vated for this purpose.
Seite 54
Controls Adjusting
54
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Forward/backward
Push switch forward or backward.
Height
Push switch up or down.
Seat tilt
Move switch up or down.
Backrest tilt
Move switch forward or backward.
Thigh support
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust
the thigh support.
Lumbar support
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re‐
gion of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright posture.
▷ Press the front/rear section
of the switch:
The curvature is increased/
decreased.
▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐
tion of the switch:
The curvature is shifted up/
down.
Seite 55
Adjusting Controls
55
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Backrest width
Change the width of the back‐
rest using the side wings to ad‐
just the lateral support.
Front seat heating
Overview
Seat heating
Switching on
Press button once for each tempera‐
ture level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi‐
nutes after a stop, seat heating is activated au‐
tomatically with the temperature selected last.
When ECO PRO is activated, the heater output
is reduced.
Switching off
Press and hold the button, until the
LEDs go out.
Rear seat heating
Overview
Seat heating
Switching on
Press button once for each tempera‐
ture level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi‐
nutes after a stop, seat heating is activated au‐
tomatically with the temperature selected last.
When ECO PRO is activated, the heater output
is reduced.
Switching off
Press and hold the button, until the
LEDs go out.
Safety belts
Number of safety belts
The vehicle is fitted with five safety belts to en‐
sure occupant safety. However, they can only
offer protection when adjusted correctly.
The two outer safety belt buckles, integrated
into the rear seat, are for passengers sitting on
the left and right.
Seite 56
Controls Adjusting
56
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
The center safety belt buckle of the rear seat is
solely intended for the person sitting in the
middle.
General information
Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by all occupants before driving off.
For the occupants' safety the belt locking
mechanism triggers early. Slowly guide the
safety belt out of the holder when applying it.
Although airbags enhance safety by providing
added protection, they are not a substitute for
safety belts.
The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point
will be correct for adult seat occupants of ev‐
ery build if the seat is correctly adjusted.
Information
WARNING
If the safety belt is used by more than
one person, the protective effect of the safety
belt cannot be ensured anymore. There is a
risk of injury or danger to life. Do not allow
more than one person to wear a single safety
belt. Infants and children are not allowed in an
occupant's lap, but must be transported and
respectively secured in designated child re‐
straint systems.◀
WARNING
The protective effect of the safety belts
can be limited or lost when safety belts are fas‐
tened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened
safety belt can cause additional injuries, e.g., in
the event of an accident or during braking and
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury or
danger to life. Make sure that all occupants are
wearing safety belts correctly.◀
WARNING
With a rear backrest that is not locked,
the protective function of the middle safety
belt is not guaranteed. There is a risk of inju‐
ries or danger to life. If you are using the mid‐
dle safety belt, lock the wider rear backrest.◀
Correct use of safety belts
▷ Wear the safety belt twist-free and as tight
to your body as possible over your lap and
shoulders.
▷ Wear the safety belt deep on your hips
over your lap. The safety belt may not
press on your stomach.
▷ Do not wear the safety belt on your throat,
rub it on sharp edges, guide it or jam it in
across hard or fragile objects.
▷ Avoid thick clothing.
▷ Re-tighten the safety belt frequently up‐
ward around your upper body.
Buckling the seat belt
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in
the belt buckle.
To ease accessibility to the seat belt buckle, an
adjustable slider is available on the belt to help
position the buckle when not in use.
Unbuckling the safety belt
1.
Hold the safety belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up
mechanism.
Seite 57
Adjusting Controls
57
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Safety belt reminder for driver's and
passenger's seat
The indicator lamp lights up and a sig‐
nal sounds. Make sure that the safety
belts are positioned correctly. The
safety belt reminder is active at speeds above
approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. It can also be activated
if objects are placed on the front passenger
seat.
Damage to safety belts
WARNING
The protective effect of the safety belts
may not be fully functional or fail in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ Safety belts are damaged, soiled or
changed in any other way.
▷ Safety belt buckle is damaged or heavily
soiled.
▷ Belt tensioners or belt retractors were
modified.
Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in
the event of an accident. There is a risk of in‐
jury or danger to life. Do not modify safety
belts, safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt
retractors or belt anchors and keep them
clean. Have the safety belts checked after an
accident at the dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.◀
Front headrests
Information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to re‐
moved or not correctly adjusted head re‐
straints can cause injuries in the head and
neck area. There is a a risk of injury. Install
head restraints on occupied seats prior to driv‐
ing and make sure that the center of the head
restraint supports the back of the head at eye
level.◀
WARNING
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck area.
There is a a risk of injury.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,
directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, e.g., pillows,
while driving.◀
Correctly adjusted head restraint
General information
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event
of an accident.
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at eye level.
Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint
is as close as possible to the back of the head.
If necessary, adjust the distance by adjusting
the tilt of the backrest.
Active head restraint
In the event of a rear-end collision with a cer‐
tain severity, the active head restraint automat‐
ically reduces the distance from the head.
Wear and tear after accidents or when dam‐
aged otherwise:
Have the active head restraint checked and if
needed replaced.
Seite 58
Controls Adjusting
58
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Adjusting the height
▷ To raise: push.
▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push
headrest down.
Removing
The head restraints cannot be removed.
Rear head restraints
Information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to re‐
moved or not correctly adjusted head re‐
straints can cause injuries in the head and
neck area. There is a a risk of injury. Install
head restraints on occupied seats prior to driv‐
ing and make sure that the center of the head
restraint supports the back of the head at eye
level.◀
WARNING
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck area.
There is a a risk of injury.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,
directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, e.g., pillows,
while driving.◀
Correctly adjusted head restraint
General information
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event
of an accident.
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at eye level.
Adjusting the height
▷ To raise: push.
▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push
headrest down.
The center head restraint cannot be adjusted
in elevation.
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
1.
Raise the head restraint up against the re‐
sistance.
2. Press button, arrow 1, and pull the head re‐
straint out completely.
Seite 59
Adjusting Controls
59
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
The center head restraint cannot be removed.
Seat and mirror memory
The concept
Two driver's seat and exterior mirror positions
can be stored per profile and called up. Set‐
tings for the backrest width and lumbar sup‐
port are not stored in memory.
Information
WARNING
Using the memory function while driving
can lead to unexpected movements of the
seat. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a
risk of an accident. Only retrieve the memory
function when the vehicle is stationary.◀
WARNING
There is risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
Overview
Storing
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Set the desired position.
3.
Press button. The LED in the but‐
ton lights up.
4. Press selected button 1 or 2 while the LED
is lit. The LED goes out.
Button was pressed inadvertently:
Press button again.
The LED goes out.
Calling up settings
General information
There are two ways to call up the memory
function:
▷ Comfort function.
▷ Safety function.
Comfort function
1.
Open the driver's door.
2. If necessary, switch off the ignition.
3. Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2.
The corresponding seat position is performed
automatically.
The procedure stops when a switch for adjust‐
ing the seat or one of the buttons is pressed.
Safety mode
1.
Close the driver's door or switch on the ig‐
nition.
2. Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2
until the adjustment procedure is com‐
pleted.
Calling up of a seat position
deactivated
After a brief period, calling up stored seat posi‐
tions is deactivated to save battery power.
To reactivate calling up of a seat position:
▷ Open or close the door or tailgate.
▷ Press a button on the remote control.
▷ Press the Start/Stop button.
Seite 60
Controls Adjusting
60
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
General information
The mirror on the passenger side is more
curved than the driver's side mirror.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mir‐
ror setting is stored for the profile currently
used. When the vehicle is unlocked via the re‐
mote control, the position is automatically re‐
trieved if this function is active.
Information
WARNING
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
than they appear. The distance to the traffic
behind could be incorrectly estimated, e.g.,
while changing lanes. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Estimate the distance to the traffic be‐
hind by looking over your shoulder.◀
Overview
1 Adjusting 61
2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Fold in and out 61
Selecting a mirror
To change over to the other mirror:
Slide the switch.
Adjusting electrically
The setting corresponds to the direc‐
tion in which the button is pressed.
Saving positions
The current exterior mirror position can be
stored via the seat and mirror memory.
Adjusting manually
In case of electrical malfunction press edges of
mirror.
Automatic Curb Monitor
The concept
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on
the front passenger side is tilted downward.
This improves your view of the curb and other
low-lying obstacles when parking, for example.
Activating
1. Slide the switch to the driver's side
mirror position.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
Deactivating
Slide the switch to the passenger side mirror
position.
Fold in and out
ATTENTION
Depending on the vehicle width, the ve‐
hicle can be damaged in vehicle washes. There
is a risk of damage to property. Before wash‐
ing, fold in the mirrors by hand or with the but‐
ton.◀
Press button.
Possible at speeds up to approx.
15 mph/20 km/h.
Seite 61
Adjusting Controls
61
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Folding the mirrors in and out is advantageous
in the following situations:
▷ In car washes.
▷ On narrow roads.
▷ For folding mirrors back out that were
folded away manually.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
whenever the engine is running.
Automatic dimming feature
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is auto‐
matically dimmed. Photocells are used to con‐
trol the Interior mirror.
Interior mirror, manually dimmable
Turn knob
Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by
the interior mirror.
Interior mirror, automatic dimming
feature
Overview
Photocells are used for control:
▷ In the mirror glass.
▷ On the back of the mirror.
Functional requirements
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the inside
rearview mirror and the windshield.
Steering wheel
Information
WARNING
Steering wheel adjustments while driving
can lead to unexpected steering wheel move‐
ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There is
risk of an accident. Adjust the steering wheel
while the vehicle is stationary only.◀
Seite 62
Controls Adjusting
62
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Adjusting
1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating posi‐
tion.
3. Fold the lever back.
Heated steering wheel
Overview
Heated steering wheel
Switching on/off
Press button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Seite 63
Adjusting Controls
63
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Transporting children safely
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
The right place for children
Information
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Children should always be in the rear
WARNING
Children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm cannot
correctly fasten the safety belt without suitable
additional restraint systems. The protective ef‐
fect of the safety belts can be limited or lost
when safety belts are fastened incorrectly. An
incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause ad‐
ditional injuries, e.g., in the event of an acci‐
dent or during braking and evasive maneuvers.
There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Secure
children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using suita‐
ble restraint systems.◀
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the rear seat.
Only transport children younger than 13 years
of age or shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm in the rear in
suitable child restraint systems provided in ac‐
cordance with the age, weight and size of the
child.
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
system can no longer be used due to their age,
weight and size.
Children on the front passenger seat
Should it ever be necessary to use a child re‐
straint system in the front passenger seat,
make sure that the front, knee and side airbags
on the front passenger side are deactivated.
Automatic deactivation of front-seat passen‐
ger airbags, refer to page 107.
Information
WARNING
Active front-seat passenger airbags can
injure a child in a child restraint system when
the airbags are activated. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger
airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.◀
Seite 64
Controls Transporting children safely
64
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
seats and backrests are securely engaged. If
possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.◀
Installing child restraint
systems
Information
Pay attention to the specifications of the child
restraint system manufacturer when selecting,
installing, and using child restraint systems.
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
seats and backrests are securely engaged. If
possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.◀
On the front passenger seat
Deactivating airbags
WARNING
Active front-seat passenger airbags can
injure a child in a child restraint system when
the airbags are activated. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger
airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.◀
After installing a child restraint system in the
front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
knee and side airbags on the front passenger
side are deactivated.
Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags
automatically, refer to page 107.
Seat position and height
Before installing a child restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back as possi‐
ble and bring it as far up as possible to obtain
the best possible position for the belt and to
offer optimal protection in the event of an acci‐
dent.
If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is lo‐
cated in front of the belt guide of the child seat,
move the passenger seat carefully forward un‐
til the best possible belt guide position is
reached.
Backrest width
Adjustable backrest width: before installing a
child restraint system in the front passenger
seat, open the backrest width completely. Do
not change the backrest width again and do
not call up a memory position.
Child seat security
The rear safety belts and the front passenger
safety belt can be permanently locked to fas‐
ten child restraint systems.
Seite 65
Transporting children safely Controls
65
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Locking the safety belt
1. Pull out the belt strap completely.
2. Secure the child restraint system with the
safety belt.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull
it tight against the child restraint system.
The safety belt is locked.
Unlocking the safety belt
1. Unbuckle the belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com‐
pletely.
LATCH child restraint fixing system
Information
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil‐
dren.
Pay attention to the operating and safety infor‐
mation of the child restraint system manufac‐
turer when installing and using LATCH child
restraint fixing system.
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child
is restrained by the internal harnesses.
Information
WARNING
If the LATCH child restraint fixing sys‐
tems are not correctly engaged, the protective
effect of the LATCH child restraint fixing sys‐
tem can be limited. There is a risk of injury or
danger to life. Make sure that the lower an‐
chors are securely engaged and that the
LATCH child restraint fixing system fits se‐
curely against the backrest.◀
Position
The corresponding symbol shows the
mounts for the lower LATCH anchors.
Seats equipped with lower anchors are
marked with a pair, 2, of LATCH sym‐
bols. It is not recommended to use the
inner lower anchors of standard outer
LATCH positions to fasten a child restraint
system on the middle seat. Use the vehicle
seat belt instead for the middle seat.
Before installing LATCH child
restraint fixing systems
Pull the safety belt away from the area of the
child restraint system.
Assembly of LATCH child restraint
fixing systems
1. Install child restraint system, see manufac‐
turer's information.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
Child restraint system with a tether
strap
Mounting points
The respective symbol shows the an‐
chor for the upper retaining strap.
Seats with an upper Top Tether are
marked with this symbol. It can be found on
the rear seat backrest or the rear window shelf.
Information
ATTENTION
The mounting points for the upper re‐
taining straps of child restraint systems are
only provided for these retaining straps. When
other objects are mounted, the anchors can be
damaged. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
Seite 66
Controls Transporting children safely
66
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
erty. Only mount child restraint systems to the
upper retaining straps.◀
Retaining strap guide
WARNING
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly
used for the child restraint system, the protec‐
tive effect can be reduced. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the upper retaining strap is
not guided across sharp edges and without
twisting to the upper retaining strap.◀
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Mounting point
5 Seat backrest
6 Upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining strap to
the mounting point
1.
Raise the head restraint if needed.
2. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the supports of the head restraint.
3. If there is a retaining strap, run it between
the backrest and the cargo cover.
4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to
the anchor.
5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it
down.
6. Lower and lock head restraints as needed.
Locking the doors and
windows in the rear
Rear doors
Push the locking lever on the rear doors down.
The door can now be opened from the outside
only.
Safety switch for the rear
Press button on the driver's door.
The LED lights up if the safety func‐
tion is switched on.
This locks various functions so that they can‐
not be operated from the rear. Safety switch,
refer to page 50.
Seite 67
Transporting children safely Controls
67
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Driving
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Start/Stop button
The concept
Pressing the Start/Stop button
switches the ignition on or off
and starts the engine.
Steptronic transmission: the en‐
gine starts with the brake pedal
pressed when you press the Start/Stop button.
Ignition on
Steptronic transmission: press the Start/Stop
button, and do not press on the brake pedal at
the same time.
All vehicle systems are ready for operation.
Most of the indicator and warning lights in the
instrument cluster light up for a varied length
of time.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
Ignition off
Steptronic transmission: press the Start/Stop
button again without stepping on the brake.
All indicator lights in the instrument cluster go
out.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
Information
When switching off the ignition, the selector
lever position P is selected automatically if the
selector lever position D or R is selected.
The ignition is switched off automatically in the
following situations while the vehicle is station‐
ary and the engine is off:
▷ When locking the vehicle, and when the
low beams are activated.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
started.
▷ When opening or closing the driver door, if
the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
the low beams are turned off.
▷ While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled
with driver's door open and low beams off.
The low beams switch to parking lights after
approx. 15 minutes of no use.
Radio ready state
Activate radio-ready state: when the engine is
running: press the Start/Stop button.
Some electronic systems/power consumers
remain ready for operation.
The radio-ready state is switched off automati‐
cally in the following situations:
▷ After approx. 8 minutes.
▷ When the vehicle is locked using the cen‐
tral locking system.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
started.
Seite 68
Controls Driving
68
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
The radio-ready state remains active if, for ex‐
ample, the ignition is automatically switched
off for the following reasons:
▷ Opening or closing the driver's door.
▷ Unfastening of the driver's safety belt.
▷ When automatically switching from low
beams to parking lights.
If the engine is switched off and the ignition is
switched on, the system automatically
switches to the radio-ready state if the lights
are turned off or, if correspondingly equipped,
the daytime running lights are activated.
Starting the engine
Information
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐
tain carbon monoxide, an odorless and color‐
less but highly toxic gas. In enclosed areas, ex‐
haust gases can also accumulate outside of
the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the
exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventila‐
tion.◀
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
ATTENTION
In the case of repeated starting attempts
or repeated starting in quick succession, the
fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned.
The catalytic converter can overheat. There is
a risk of damage to property. Avoid repeated
starting in quick succession.◀
Diesel engine
If the engine is cold and temperatures are be‐
low approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃, the start process may
be delayed somewhat due to automatic pre‐
heating.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Steptronic transmission
Starting the engine
1.
Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a
certain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐
gine starts.
Engine stop
Information
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
Seite 69
Driving Controls
69
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
Before driving into a car wash
So that the vehicle can roll into a car wash ob‐
serve instructions for going into an automatic
car wash, refer to page 243.
Steptronic transmission
Switching off the engine
1.
Engage selector lever position P with the
vehicle stopped.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off.
The radio-ready state is switched on.
3. Set the parking brake.
Auto Start/Stop function
The concept
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
The system switches off the engine during a
stop, for example, in traffic congestion or at
traffic lights. The ignition remains switched on.
The engine starts automatically for driving off.
Information
After every start of the engine using the Start/
Stop button, the Auto Start/Stop function is in
the last selected state. When the Auto Start/
Stop function is active, it is available when the
vehicle is traveling faster than about 3 mph,
approx. 5 km/h.
Engine stop
The engine is switched off automatically dur‐
ing a stop under the following conditions:
Steptronic transmission:
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐
tion D.
▷ The brake pedal remains pressed while the
vehicle is stationary or the vehicle is held
by Automatic Hold.
▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
driver's door is closed.
The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced
when the engine is switched off.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The display indicates that the
Auto Start/Stop function is
ready for an Automatic engine
start.
The display indicates that the
conditions for an automatic en‐
gine stop have not been met.
Functional limitations
The engine is not switched off automatically in
the following situations:
▷ External temperature too low.
▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐
matic climate control is running.
Seite 70
Controls Driving
70
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated
or cooled to the required level.
▷ The engine is not yet at operating temper‐
ature.
▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the
steering wheel is being turned.
▷ After driving in reverse.
▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐
matic climate control is switched on.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ At higher elevations.
▷ The engine compartment lid is unlocked.
▷ HDC Hill Descent Control is activated.
▷ The parking assistant is activated.
▷ Stop-and-go traffic.
▷ Selector lever in selector lever position N,
M/S or R.
▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content.
Starting the engine
The engine starts automatically under the fol‐
lowing conditions:
▷ Steptronic transmission: by releasing the
brake pedal.
When Automatic Hold is activated: press
the accelerator pedal.
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
Safety mode
After the engine switches off automatically, it
will not start again automatically if any one of
the following conditions are met:
▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
the driver's door is open.
▷ The hood was unlocked.
Some indicator lights light up for a varied
length of time.
The engine can only be started via the Start/
Stop button.
Functional limitations
Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐
vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ Excessive warming of the car's interior
when the cooling function is switched on.
▷ The steering wheel is turned.
▷ Steptronic transmission: change from se‐
lector lever position D to R, N or M/S.
▷ Steptronic transmission: change from se‐
lector lever position P to N, D, R or M/S.
▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐
matic climate control is switched on.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ Excessive cooling of the car's interior when
the heating is switched on.
Activating/deactivating the system
manually
Using the button
Press button.
▷ LED comes on: Auto Start/Stop function is
deactivated.
The engine is started during an automatic
engine stop.
The engine can only be stopped or started
via the Start/Stop button.
▷ LED goes out: Auto Start/Stop function is
activated.
Seite 71
Driving Controls
71
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Switching off the vehicle during an
automatic engine stop
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle
can be switched off permanently, e.g., when
leaving it.
Steptronic transmission:
1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is
switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function
is deactivated.
Selector lever position P is engaged auto‐
matically.
2. Set the parking brake.
Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.
Automatic deactivation
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func‐
tion is deactivated automatically for safety rea‐
sons, as it is detected that no driver is present.
Malfunction
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer
switches off the engine automatically. A Check
Control message is displayed. It is possible to
continue driving. Have the system checked by
a dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Parking brake
The concept
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehi‐
cle from rolling when it is parked.
Information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Overview
Parking brake
Setting
Pull the switch.
The LED lights up.
Seite 72
Controls Driving
72
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
The indicator lamp lights up red. The
parking brake is set.
While driving
Use as emergency brake while driving:
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes
hard while the switch is being pulled.
The indicator lamp lights up red, a sig‐
nal sounds and the brake lights light
up.
A Check Control message is displayed.
If the vehicle is slowed down to a speed of ap‐
prox. 2 mph/3 km/h the parking brake is set.
Releasing
With the ignition switched on:
Steptronic transmission: press the
switch while the brake is pressed or se‐
lector lever position P is set.
The LED and indicator lamp go out.
The parking brake is released.
Automatic release in cars with
Steptronic transmission
For automatic release, step on the accelerator
pedal.
The LED and indicator lamp go out.
The parking brake is automatically released
when you step on the accelerator:
▷ Engine on.
▷ Drive mode engaged.
▷ Driver buckled in and doors closed.
Automatic Hold
The concept
This system assists the driver by automatically
setting and releasing the brake, such as when
moving in stop-and-go traffic.
The vehicle is automatically held in place when
it is stationary.
On inclines, the system prevents the vehicle
from rolling backward when driving off.
Overview
Automatic Hold
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
Under the following conditions, Automatic
Hold is automatically deactivated and the park‐
ing brake is set:
▷ The engine is switched off.
▷ A door is opened and driver's safety belt is
unbuckled while the vehicle is stationary.
▷ The moving vehicle is brought to a stand‐
still using the parking brake.
Seite 73
Driving Controls
73
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
The indicator lamp switches from
green to red and the letters AUTO H go
out.
Activating
This function can be activated when the driv‐
er's door is closed, the safety belt is fastened
and the engine is running.
Press button.
The LED and the letters AUTO H light
up.
The indicator lamp lights up.
Automatic Hold is activated.
Deactivating
Press button again.
The LED and the letters AUTO H go
out.
Automatic Hold is deactivated.
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,
press on the brake pedal to deactivate it.
When the parking brake is set manually, Auto‐
matic Hold is deactivated automatically.
Driving
Automatic Hold is activated: the vehicle is au‐
tomatically secured against rolling after brak‐
ing to a standstill.
The indicator lamp lights up green.
Step on the accelerator pedal to drive
off.
The brake is released automatically.
The indicator lamp goes out.
ATTENTION
If the vehicle is stationary, Automatic
Hold engages the parking brake. It prevents
the vehicle from rolling in a vehicle wash.
There is a risk of damage to property. Deacti‐
vate Automatic Hold prior to entering the vehi‐
cle wash.◀
Parking
The parking brake is automatically set if the
engine is switched off while the vehicle is be‐
ing held by Automatic Hold.
The indicator lamp changes from green
to red.
The parking brake is not set if the en‐
gine is switched off while the vehicle is coast‐
ing to a halt. Automatic Hold is deactivated.
Automatic Hold remains activated during the
engine stop brought about by the Auto Start/
Stop function.
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Malfunction
In the event of a failure or malfunction of the
parking brake, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing using a wheel chock, e.g., when leaving it.
After a power failure
Putting the parking brake into
operation
1.
Switch on the ignition.
Seite 74
Controls Driving
74
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
2.
Press the switch while stepping on
the brake pedal or selector lever position P
is set.
It may take several seconds for the brake to be
put into operation. Any sounds associated with
this are normal.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster goes out as soon as the parking
brake is ready for operation.
Turn signal, high beams,
headlight flasher
Turn signal
Turn signal in exterior mirror
When driving and during operation of the turn
signals or hazard warning system, do not fold
in the exterior mirrors, so that the signal lights
on the exterior mirror are easy to see.
Using turn signals
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
The turn signal lever returns into its starting
position after actuation.
To switch off manually, slightly tap the lever to
the resistance point.
Triple turn signal activation
Slightly tap lever.
The turn signal flashes three times.
The function can be activated or deactivated.
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Triple turn signal"
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Signaling briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there for as long as you want the turn signal
to flash.
Malfunction
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp
indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
High beams, headlight flasher
▷ High beams, arrow 1.
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Washer/wiper system
Switching the wipers on/off and brief
wipe
General information
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry,
as this may damage the wiper blades or cause
them to become worn more quickly.
Seite 75
Driving Controls
75
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Information
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐
age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is
a risk of injury or risk of property damage.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off
when the wipers are in the folded away state
and the wipers are folded in when switching
on.◀
ATTENTION
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper
motor can overheat when switching on. There
is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the
windshield prior to switching the wipers on.◀
Switching on
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
▷ Normal wiper speed: tap up once.
The wipers switch to intermittent operation
when the vehicle is stationary.
▷ Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once
beyond the resistance point.
Wipers change to normal speed when ve‐
hicle comes to standstill.
Switching off and brief wipe
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
▷ Brief wipe: press down once.
▷ To switch off from normal wiper speed:
press down once.
▷ To switch off from fast wiper speed: press
down twice.
Interval mode or rain sensor
The concept
Without the rain sensor, the frequency of the
wiper operation is preset.
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of
the rainfall. The sensor is located on the wind‐
shield, directly behind the interior mirror.
Activating/deactivating
Press button on the wiper lever.
Wiping is started. If the vehicle is equipped
with a rain sensor: LED in wiper lever lights up.
Seite 76
Controls Driving
76
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
When wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper
operation is deactivated.
ATTENTION
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers
can accidentally start moving in vehicle
washes. There is a risk of damage to property.
Deactivate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.◀
Setting the frequency or sensitivity of
the rain sensor
Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency
or sensitivity of the rain sensor.
Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain
sensor.
Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain
sensor.
Clean the windshield, headlamps
Pull the wiper lever towards you.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
In addition, the headlamps are cleaned at regu‐
lar intervals when the vehicle's lights are acti‐
vated.
WARNING
The washer fluid can freeze onto the win‐
dow at low temperatures and obstruct the
view. There is risk of an accident. Only use the
washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot
freeze. Use antifreeze, if needed.◀
ATTENTION
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,
the wash pump cannot work as intended.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
use the washer system when the washer fluid
reservoir is empty.◀
Windshield washer nozzles
The windshield washer nozzles are automati‐
cally heated while the ignition is switched on.
Rear window wiper
Switching on the rear window wiper
Turn the switch from idle position 0 upward,
arrow 1: interval mode. When reverse gear is
engaged, the system switches to continuous
operation.
Cleaning rear window
In interval mode: turn the switch further, ar‐
row 2. The switch automatically returns to its
interval position when released.
Seite 77
Driving Controls
77
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
In idle position: turn switch downward, arrow 3.
The switch automatically returns to its idle po‐
sition when released.
Fold-away position of the wipers
Important, when changing the wiper blades or
when folding out under frosty conditions, for
example.
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐
age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is
a risk of injury or risk of property damage.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off
when the wipers are in the folded away state
and the wipers are folded in when switching
on.◀
1.
Switch the ignition on and off again.
2. With icy conditions make sure that blades
are not frozen to the windshield.
3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point
of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec‐
onds, until the wipers remain in a nearly
vertical position
4. Lift the wiper all the way off of the wind‐
shield.
After the wipers are folded back down, the
wiper system must be reactivated.
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to
their resting position and are ready again
for operation.
Washer fluid
General information
All washer nozzles are supplied from one res‐
ervoir.
Prepare a mixture of tap water, windshield
washer concentrate, and possibly antifreeze
prior to filling.
Recommended minimum fill quantity:
0.2 US gal/1 liter.
Information
WARNING
Some antifreeze agents can contain
harmful substances and are flammable. There
is risk of fire and a risk of injury. Observe the
instructions on the containers. Keep antifreeze
away from ignition sources. Do not refill oper‐
ating materials into different bottles. Store op‐
erating materials out of reach of children.
United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is
regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
states; do not exceed the allowable washer
fluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the
usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐
tainer.
Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concen‐
trate or the equivalent is recommended.◀
WARNING
Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on
contact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of
injury or risk of property damage. Only add
washer fluid when the engine is cooled down.
Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid res‐
ervoir.◀
ATTENTION
Silicon-containing additives in the
washer fluid for the water-repelling effect on
the windows can lead to damage to the wash‐
ing system. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Do not add silicon-containing additives to
the washer fluid.◀
Seite 78
Controls Driving
78
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
ATTENTION
Mixing different windshield washer con‐
centrates or antifreeze agents can damage the
washing system. There is a risk of damage to
property. Do not mix different windshield
washer concentrates or antifreeze agents. Ob‐
serve the information and mixing ratios pro‐
vided on the containers.◀
The use of undiluted windshield washer con‐
centrate or alcohol-based antifreeze can lead
to incorrect readings at temperatures below
+ 5 ℉/- 15 ℃.
Overview
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the en‐
gine compartment.
Steptronic transmission
Information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
Selector lever positions
D Drive
Selector lever position for normal vehicle oper‐
ation. All gears for forward travel are activated
automatically.
R Reverse
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
N Neutral
The vehicle may roll in selector lever posi‐
tion N, e.g. in car washes.
When the ignition is switched off, refer to
page 68, selector lever position P is engaged
automatically.
P Park
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The
drive wheels are blocked.
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐
cally in the following situations:
▷ After the engine is switched off when the
vehicle is in radio-ready state, refer to
page 68, or when the ignition is switched
off, refer to page 68, and when selector
lever position R or D is set.
▷ With the ignition off, if selector lever posi‐
tion N is engaged.
▷ If the driver's safety belt is unbuckled, the
driver's door is opened, and the brake
pedal is not pressed while the vehicle is
stationary and selector lever position D
or R is engaged.
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance. Step on the accelerator pedal
beyond the resistance point at the full throttle
position.
Seite 79
Driving Controls
79
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Engaging selector lever positions
General information
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
select a gear, maintain pressure on the brake
pedal until you are ready to start.
▷ It is not possible to shift out of selector
lever position P until the engine is running
and the brake is applied.
▷ With the vehicle stationary, depress the
brake pedal before shifting out of selector
lever position P or N; otherwise, the shift
block will not be deactivated and the shift
command will not be executed.
Selector lever lock
A lock prevents the inadvertent switching to
selector lever position R or the inadvertent
change from selector lever position P.
Cancelling the lock: Press unlock button, ar‐
row.
Engaging selector lever position D, N,
R
Briefly tap the selector lever in the desired di‐
rection, beyond a resistance point if needed.
After releasing the selector lever, it returns to
its center position.
Engage selector lever position P
Press P button, arrow.
Sport program and manual mode
Activating the sport program
Press the selector lever to the left out of selec‐
tor lever position D.
Seite 80
Controls Driving
80
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster, for example, S1.
The sport program of the transmission is acti‐
vated.
Activating the M/S manual mode
1. Press the selector lever to the left out of
selector lever position D.
2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it
backward.
Manual mode M/S becomes active and the
gear is changed.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster, for example, M1.
If the situation requires, the Steptronic trans‐
mission continues to shift automatically.
Example: once maximum engine speed is at‐
tained, M/S manual mode is automatically up‐
shifted as needed.
Switching to manual mode
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rear‐
wards.
Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine
and road speeds, for example downshifting is
not possible if the engine speed is too high.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the currently se‐
lected gear.
Steptronic Sport transmission: avoid
automatic upshifting in M/S manual
mode
The Steptronic Sport transmission does not
automatically upshift in M/S manual mode
once the maximum speed is reached, if one of
the following conditions is met:
▷ DSC deactivated.
▷ TRACTION activated.
▷ SPORT+ activated.
In addition, there is no downshifting for kick‐
down.
With the respective transmission version, the
lowest possible gear can be selected by simul‐
taneously operating the kickdown and the left
shift paddle. This is not possible, when switch‐
ing briefly via the shift paddles from selector
lever position D to manual mode M/S.
Ending the sport program/manual
mode
Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Shift paddles
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow
you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
hands on the steering wheel.
▷ Shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle.
▷ Shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle.
▷ With the respective transmission version,
the lowest possible gear can be selected
by pulling and holding the left shift paddle.
Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine
and road speeds, for example downshifting is
not possible if the engine speed is too high.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are
used to shift gears in automatic mode, the
transmission switches to manual mode tempo‐
rarily in selector lever position D and perma‐
nently in selector lever position S.
Seite 81
Driving Controls
81
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
In selector lever position D, after conservative
driving for a certain amount of time in manual
mode or if there has been no acceleration or
shifting of the shift paddles within a certain
amount of time, the transmission switches
back to automatic mode.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The selector lever position is dis‐
played, for example: P.
Electronic unlocking of the
transmission lock
General information
Electronically unlock the transmission lock to
maneuver vehicle from the danger area.
Unlocking is possible, if the starter can spin the
engine.
Before unlocking the transmission lock, apply
the parking brake to prevent the vehicle from
rolling away.
Engaging selector lever position N
1.
Press and hold down brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter
must audibly start.
3. Press the unlock button on the selector
lever, see arrow 1, and press and hold the
selector lever into selector lever position N,
see arrow N.
A corresponding Check Control message
is displayed.
4. Release the selector lever and press it
again into selector lever position N within
approx. 6 seconds.
Selector lever position N is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
5. Release brake, as soon as the starter
stops.
6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area
and secure it against moving on its own.
For further information, see the Tow-starting
and towing chapter.
Steptronic Sport transmission:
Launch Control
The concept
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration
on surfaces with good traction.
General information
The use of Launch Control causes premature
component wear since this function represents
a very heavy load for the vehicle.
Do not use Launch Control during the break-in,
refer to page 182, period.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
again as soon as possible.
An experienced driver may be able to achieve
better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.
Seite 82
Controls Driving
82
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Requirements
Launch Control is available when the engine is
warmed up, that is, after uninterrupted driving
of at least 6 miles/10 km.
To start with Launch Control do not steer the
steering wheel.
Start with launch control
While the engine is running:
1.
Press button or select Sport+ with
the Driving Dynamics Control.
TRACTION is displayed in the instrument
cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF
lights up.
2. Engage selector lever position S.
3. With the left foot, forcefully press down on
the brake.
4. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal
beyond the resistance point at the full
throttle position, kickdown.
A flag symbol is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within
3 seconds, release the brake.
Before using Launch Control again, allow the
transmission to cool down for approx. 5 mi‐
nutes.
Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding
conditions, for example, wet pavement, when
used again.
Seite 83
Driving Controls
83
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Displays
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Overview, instrument cluster
1 Fuel gauge 89
2 Speedometer
3 Messages, for example, Check Control
4 Tachometer 89
5 Engine oil temperature 89
6 Current fuel consumption
7 Electronic displays 84
8 Reset miles 89
Electronic displays
▷ Selection lists, refer to page 93.
▷ External temperature, refer to page 89.
▷ Auto Start/Stop function, refer to page 70.
▷ Onboard computer, refer to page 94.
▷ Date, refer to page 90.
▷ Energy recovery, refer to page 90.
▷ Transmission display, refer to page 82.
▷ Miles/trip miles, refer to page 89.
Seite 84
Controls Displays
84
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
▷ Messages, e.g. Check Control, refer to
page 85.
▷ Navigation display, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐
cation.
▷ Range, refer to page 90.
▷ Status, Driving Dynamics Control, refer to
page 133.
▷ Service requirements, refer to page 91.
▷ Speed limit detection, refer to page 92.
▷ Time, refer to page 89.
Check Control
The concept
The Check Control system monitors functions
in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions
in the monitored systems.
A Check Control message is displayed as a
combination of indicator or warning lights and
text messages in the instrument cluster and in
the Head-up Display.
In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and a
text message may appear on the Control Dis‐
play.
Indicator/warning lights
General information
The indicator and warning lights in the instru‐
ment cluster can light up in a variety of combi‐
nations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
Red lights
Safety belt reminder
Safety belt on the driver's side is not
buckled. For some country-specific
models: passenger belt is not worn or
objects are detected on the front passenger
seat.
Flashing or illuminated: safety belt on the
driver or passenger side is not buckled. The
safety belt reminder can also be activated if
objects are placed on the front passenger seat.
Make sure that the safety belts are positioned
correctly.
Airbag system
Airbag system and belt tensioner are
not working.
Have the vehicle checked immediately
by a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
Parking brake
The parking brake is set.
For additional information, refer to Re‐
lease parking brake, refer to page 73.
Brake system
Braking system disrupted. Continue to
drive moderately.
Have the vehicle checked immediately
by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Front-end collision warning
Illuminated: advance warning is issued,
e.g., when there is the impending dan‐
ger of a collision or the distance to the
vehicle ahead is too small.
Increase distance.
Flashing: acute warning of the imminent dan‐
ger of a collision when the vehicle approaches
another vehicle at a relatively high differential
speed.
Intervention by braking or make an evasive ma‐
neuver.
Seite 85
Displays Controls
85
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Pedestrian warning
Symbol in the instrument cluster.
If a collision with a person detected in
this way is imminent, the symbol lights
up and a signal sounds.
Orange lights
Active Cruise Control
The number bars shows the selected
distance from the vehicle driving
ahead.
For additional information, refer to Active
Cruise Control with Stop&Go function, ACC,
refer to page 136.
Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control
Illuminated: vehicle driving ahead de‐
tected.
Flashing: the conditions are not ade‐
quate for operating the system.
The system was deactivated but applies the
brakes until you actively resume control by
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator
pedal.
Yellow lights
Anti-lock Braking System ABS
Avoid sudden braking as much as pos‐
sible. Braking force boost may not be
working. Take into account the longer
brake distance. Have the system im‐
mediately checked by a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
Flashing: DSC controls the drive and
braking forces. The vehicle is stabi‐
lized. Reduce speed and adapt driving style to
the driving circumstances.
Illuminated: DSC failed. Have the system
checked by a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
For additional information, refer to Dynamic
Stability Control DSC, refer to page 129.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is
deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction
Control is activated
Dynamic Stability Control DSC is
switched off or Dynamic Traction Con‐
trol DTC is switched on.
For additional information, refer to Dynamic
Stability Control DSC, refer to page 129, and
Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to
page 130.
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of
tire inflation pressure in a tire.
Reduce your speed and stop cau‐
tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma‐
neuvers.
For more information, see Flat Tire Monitor, re‐
fer to page 112.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
Illuminated: the Tire Pressure Monitor
signals a loss of tire inflation pressure
in a tire.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid
sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
Flashing and then continuously illuminated: no
flat tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be
detected.
▷ Interference through systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: After leav‐
ing the area of the interference, the system
automatically becomes active again.
Seite 86
Controls Displays
86
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset.
Reset the system again.
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is
mounted: Have it checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop as needed.
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
For more information, see Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor, refer to page 108.
Steering system
Steering system in some cases not
working.
Have the steering system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Engine functions
Have the vehicle checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
For additional information, refer to On-board
Diagnostics socket, refer to page 227.
Lane departure warning
System is switched on and under cer‐
tain circumstances warns if a detected
lane is left without flashing beforehand.
For additional information, refer to Lane depar‐
ture warning, refer to page 124.
Green lights
Turn signal
Turn signal switched on.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb
has failed.
For additional information, refer to Turn signal,
refer to page 75.
Parking lights, headlight control
Parking lights or headlights are acti‐
vated.
For additional information, refer to
Parking lights/low beams, headlamp control,
refer to page 100.
Front fog lights
Front fog lights are activated.
For additional information, refer to
Front fog lights, refer to page 103.
High-beam Assistant
High-beam Assistant is switched on.
High beams are activated and off auto‐
matically as a function of the traffic sit‐
uation.
For additional information, refer to High-beam
Assistant, refer to page 102.
Cruise control
The system is switched on. It maintains
the speed that was set using the con‐
trol elements on the steering wheel.
Automatic Hold
Function is activated. The vehicle is au‐
tomatically held in place when it is sta‐
tionary.
For more information, see Automatic Hold, re‐
fer to page 73.
Seite 87
Displays Controls
87
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Blue lights
High beams
High beams are activated.
For additional information, refer to High
beams, refer to page 75.
General lamps
Check Control
At least one Check Control message is
displayed or is stored.
Text messages
Text messages in combination with a symbol
in the instrument cluster explain a Check Con‐
trol message and the meaning of the indicator
and warning lights.
Supplementary text messages
Additional information, such as on the cause of
an error or the required action, can be called up
via Check Control.
With urgent messages the added text will be
automatically displayed on the Control Display.
Symbols
Within the supplementary text, the following
functions can be selected independent of the
check control message.
▷ Display additional information about
the Check Control message in the Inte‐
grated Owner's Manual.
▷ "Service request"
Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair
shop.
▷ "Roadside Assistance"
Contact Roadside Assistance.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press and hold button on turn signal lever.
▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐
played continuously and are not cleared
until the malfunction is eliminated. If sev‐
eral malfunctions occur at once, the mes‐
sages are displayed consecutively.
These messages can be faded for approx.
8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐
played again automatically.
▷ Other Check Control messages are faded
automatically after approx. 20 seconds.
They are stored and can be displayed
again later.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
On the Control Display:
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the text message.
Messages after trip completion
Special messages displayed while driving are
displayed again after the ignition is switched
off.
Seite 88
Controls Displays
88
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Fuel gauge
Vehicle tilt position may cause
the display to vary.
Depending on the equipment
version, the arrow beside the
fuel pump symbol shows which
side of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.
Information on refueling, refer to page 198.
Tachometer
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning
field. In this range, the fuel supply is inter‐
rupted to protect the engine.
Engine oil temperature
▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at
the low temperature end.
Drive at moderate engine
and vehicle speeds.
▷ Normal operating tempera‐
ture: the pointer is in the
middle or in the left half of
the temperature display.
▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high end of
the temperature range. In addition, a Check
Control message is displayed.
Coolant temperature
If the coolant along with the engine becomes
too hot, a Check Control message is displayed.
Check the coolant level.
Odometer and trip odometer
Display
▷ Odometer, arrow 1.
▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2.
Show/reset kilometers
Press the knob.
▷ When the ignition is
switched off, the time, the
external temperature and
the odometer are displayed.
▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip
odometer is reset.
External temperature
If the indicator drops to
+37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a signal
sounds.
A Check Control message is
displayed.
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
WARNING
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
there can be a danger of icy roads, e.g., on
bridges or shady sections of road. There is risk
of an accident. Adjust your driving style to the
weather conditions at low temperatures.◀
Time
The time is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
The time can be set on the Con‐
trol Display.
Seite 89
Displays Controls
89
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Date
The date is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
The date can be set on the Con‐
trol Display.
Range
Display
With a low remaining range:
▷ A Check Control message is
displayed briefly.
▷ The remaining range is
shown on the onboard com‐
puter.
▷ With a dynamic driving style, for example
taking curves aggressively, the engine
function is not always ensured.
The Check Control message appears continu‐
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
ATTENTION
With a range of less than 30 miles/50 km
it is possible that the engine will no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐
sured anymore. There is a risk of damage to
property. Refuel promptly.◀
Displaying the cruising range
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the range can also be displayed as bar in the
instrument cluster.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Instrument cluster"
3. "Additional indicators"
With navigation system: range with
destination guidance active
If respective equipment is fitted
and destination guidance is ac‐
tive, the remaining range is dis‐
played when the destination is
reached.
Current fuel consumption
Display
Depending on your vehicle's op‐
tional features, the current fuel
consumption can be displayed
as scale with mechanical pointer
or as digital bar display in the
lower area of the tachometer.
The current consumption displays the current
fuel consumption. Check whether you are cur‐
rently driving in an efficient and environmen‐
tally-friendly manner.
Displaying the current fuel
consumption
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the current fuel consumption can also be dis‐
played as bar in the instrument cluster.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Instrument cluster"
3. "Additional indicators"
Energy recovery
Display
The kinetic energy of the vehicle
is converted to electrical energy
while Coasting. The vehicle bat‐
tery is partially charged and fuel
consumption can be reduced.
Seite 90
Controls Displays
90
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Service requirements
The concept
After the ignition is turned on the instrument
cluster briefly displays available driving dis‐
tance or time to the next scheduled mainte‐
nance.
A service advisor can read out the current
service requirements from your remote con‐
trol.
Display
Detailed information on service
requirements
More information on the scope of service re‐
quired can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and le‐
gally mandated inspections are displayed.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐
tion.
Symbols
Sym‐
bols
Description
No service is currently required.
The deadline for scheduled mainte‐
nance or a legally mandated inspec‐
tion is approaching.
The service deadline has already
passed.
Entering appointment dates
Enter the dates for the required inspections.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are
set correctly.
On the Control Display:
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
4. "§ Vehicle inspection"
5. "Date:"
6. Adjust the settings.
7. Confirm.
The entered date is stored.
Automatic Service Request
Data regarding the service status or legally
mandated vehicle inspections are automati‐
cally transmitted to your dealer’s service cen‐
ter before a service due date.
You can check when your dealer’s service cen‐
ter was notified.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Last Service Request"
Gear shift indicator
The concept
The system recommends the most fuel effi‐
cient gear for the current driving situation.
General information
Depending on the vehicle's features and coun‐
try version of the vehicle, the gear shift indica‐
tor is active in the manual mode of the Step‐
tronic transmission and with manual
transmission.
Suggestions to shift gear up or down are dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Seite 91
Displays Controls
91
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the
engaged gear is displayed.
Steptronic transmission: displaying
Example Description
Fuel efficient gear is set.
Shift into fuel efficient gear.
Speed limit detection
The concept
Speed limit detection
Speed limit detection shows the current maxi‐
mum permitted speed in the instrument clus‐
ter. The camera in the area of the interior mir‐
ror detects traffic signs at the edge of the road
as well as variable overhead sign posts. Traffic
signs with extra symbols for wet road condi‐
tions, etc. are also detected and compared
with the vehicle's onboard data, such as for the
rain sensor, and will be displayed depending
on the situation. The system takes into ac‐
count the information stored in the navigation
system and also displays speed limits present
on routes without signs.
Information
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess visi‐
bility and traffic situation. There is risk of an ac‐
cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
intervene in the respective situations.◀
Overview
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Instrument cluster"
3. "Speed limit information"
If speed limit detection is switched on, it can
be displayed on the CID (central information
display) in the instrument cluster via the on‐
board computer.
Display
The following is displayed in the instrument
cluster:
Speed limit detection
Current speed limit.
Speed limit detection not availa‐
ble.
Seite 92
Controls Displays
92
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Speed limit detection can also be displayed in
the Head-up Display.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional and
may provide incorrect information in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ When signs are fully or partially concealed
by objects, stickers or paint.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights or strong
reflections.
▷ When the windshield behind the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by a
sticker, etc.
▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the
camera.
▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation
system are incorrect.
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
tem.
▷ When roads differ from the navigation,
such as due to changes in road routing.
▷ When passing buses or trucks with a
speed sticker.
▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ When signs are detected valid for a parallel
road.
Selection lists in the
instrument cluster
The concept
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the following can be displayed or operated us‐
ing the buttons and the thumbwheel on the
steering wheel as well as the displays in the in‐
strument cluster and the Head-up Display:
▷ Current audio source.
▷ Redial phone feature.
▷ Turn on voice activation system.
Display
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the list in the instrument cluster can differ from
the illustration shown.
Activating a list and adjusting the
setting
On the right side of the steering wheel, turn
the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding
list.
Using the thumbwheel, select the desired set‐
ting and confirm it by pushing the thumbwheel.
Seite 93
Displays Controls
93
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Onboard computer
Calling up information on the info
display
Press and hold button on turn signal lever.
Information is displayed in the info display of
the instrument cluster.
Information at a glance
CID (central information display)
Repeatedly pressing the button
on the turn signal lever calls up
the following information in the
CID (central information display):
▷ Range.
▷ Average consumption, fuel.
▷ Average speed.
▷ Date.
▷ Speed limit detection.
▷ Time of arrival.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ Distance to destination.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ Arrow view of navigation system.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
When the arrow view in the Head-up Dis‐
play is inactive.
▷ Compass display in the navigation system.
▷ ECO PRO bonus range.
Selecting information
Depending on the vehicle equipment version,
you can select what information from the on‐
board computer is to be displayed on the info
display of the instrument cluster.
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Instrument cluster"
3. Select the desired information.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Information in detail
Range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel.
It is calculated based on your driving style over
the last 20 miles/30 km.
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the period while the engine is running.
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the distance traveled since the last reset by the
onboard computer.
Average speed
Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the
engine manually stopped are not included in
the calculation of the average speed.
Seite 94
Controls Displays
94
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Resetting average values
Press and hold button on turn signal lever.
Distance to destination
The distance remaining to the destination is
displayed if a destination is entered in the navi‐
gation system before the trip is started.
The distance to the destination is adopted au‐
tomatically.
Time of arrival
The estimated time of arrival is
displayed if a destination is en‐
tered in the navigation system
before the trip is started.
The time must be correctly set.
Speed limit detection
Further information, see chapter Speed limit
detection.
Compass
With a navigation system: com‐
pass display for the driving di‐
rection.
Trip onboard computer
The vehicle features two types of onboard
computers.
▷ "Onboard info": the values can be reset as
often as necessary.
▷ "Trip computer": the values provide an
overview of the current trip.
Resetting the trip onboard computer
On the Control Display:
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Trip computer"
3. "Reset": all values are reset.
"Automatically reset": all values are reset
approx. 4 hours after the vehicle came to a
standstill.
Display on the Control Display
Display the onboard computer or trip onboard
computer on the Control Display.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Resetting the fuel consumption and
speed
On the Control Display:
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Onboard info"
3. "Consumpt." or "Speed"
4. "Yes"
Sport displays
The concept
On the Control Display, the current values for
performance and torque can be displayed if
the vehicle is appropriately equipped.
Displaying sport displays on the
Control Display
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Sport displays"
Seite 95
Displays Controls
95
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Speed warning
The concept
Displays a speed, when reached, should cause
a warning to be issued.
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed
drops below the set speed once by at least
3 mph/5 km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing the
speed warning
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning at:"
4. Turn the Controller until the desired speed
is displayed.
5. Press the Controller.
Speed warning is stored.
Activating/deactivating the speed
warning
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning"
4. Press the Controller.
Setting your current speed as the
speed warning
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Select current speed"
4. Press the Controller.
The current vehicle speed is stored as the
speed warning.
Settings on the Control
Display
Time
Setting the time zone
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time zone:"
4. Select the desired time zone.
The time zone is stored.
Setting the time
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time:"
4. Turn the Controller until the desired hours
are displayed.
5. Press the Controller.
6. Turn the Controller until the desired mi‐
nutes are displayed.
7. Press the Controller.
The time is stored.
Setting the time format
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The time format is stored.
Automatic time setting
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are
updated automatically.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Auto time set"
Seite 96
Controls Displays
96
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Date
Setting the date
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Date:"
4. Turn the Controller until the desired day is
displayed.
5. Press the Controller.
6. Make the necessary settings for the month
and year.
The date is stored.
Setting the date format
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The date format is stored.
Language
Setting the language
To set the language on the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Language:"
4. Select the desired language.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Setting the voice dialog
Voice dialog for the voice activation system,
refer to page 28.
Units of measurement
Setting the units of measurement
To set the units for fuel consumption, route/
distance and temperature:
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. Select the desired menu item.
4. Select the desired unit.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Brightness.
Setting the brightness
To set the brightness of the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Control display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
5. Press the Controller.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness settings may not be clearly visible.
Activating/deactivating display of the
current vehicle position
If GPS geolocation has been activated, the cur‐
rent vehicle position can be displayed in the
BMW ConnectedDrive app or in the Connec‐
tedDrive customer portal.
1.
"Settings"
2. "GPS tracking"
3. "GPS tracking"
Seite 97
Displays Controls
97
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Head-up Display
The concept
This system projects important information
into the driver's field of vision, e. g., the speed.
The driver can get information without averting
his or her eyes from the road.
Information
Follow the instructions for cleaning the Head-
up Display, refer to page 246.
Overview
Display visibility
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up
Display is influenced by the following factors:
▷ Certain sitting positions.
▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐
play.
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
▷ Wet roads.
▷ Unfavorable light conditions.
If the image is distorted, have the basic set‐
tings checked by a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop.
Switching on/off
1.
"Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Head-Up Display"
Display
Overview
The following information is displayed on the
Head-up Display:
▷ Speed.
▷ Navigation system.
▷ Check Control messages.
▷ Selection list from the instrument cluster.
▷ Driver assistance systems.
Some of this information is only displayed
briefly as needed.
Selecting displays in the Head-up
Display
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Displayed information"
4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up
Display.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Setting the brightness
The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
ambient brightness.
The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
5. Press the Controller.
When the low beams are activated, the bright‐
ness of the Head-up Display can be addition‐
ally influenced using the instrument lighting.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Seite 98
Controls Displays
98
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Adjusting the height
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Height"
4. Turn the Controller until the desired height
is reached.
5. Press the Controller.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Setting the rotation
The screen of the Head-up Display can be ro‐
tated around its own axis.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Rotation"
4. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐
ting is selected.
5. Press the Controller.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system.
The shape of the windshield makes it possible
to display a precise image.
A film in the windshield prevents double im‐
ages from being displayed.
For this reason, it is strongly suggested to
have the special windshield replaced by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Seite 99
Displays Controls
99
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Lights
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Overview
Switches in the vehicle
The light switch element is located next to the
steering wheel.
Light functions
Symbol Function
Front fog lights
Automatic headlamp control
Adaptive Light Control
Lights off
Daytime running lights
Symbol Function
Parking lights
Low beams
Instrument lighting
Parking lights, low beams
and roadside parking lights
General information
Position of switch: , ,
If the driver door is opened with the ignition
switched off, the exterior lighting is automati‐
cally switched off at these switch settings.
Parking lights
Position of switch:
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended pe‐
riods; otherwise, they might drain the battery
and it would then be impossible to start the en‐
gine.
When parking, switch on the one-sided road‐
side parking lamp, refer to page 100.
Low beams
Position of switch:
The low beams light up when the ignition is
switched on.
Roadside parking lights
The concept
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
Seite 100
Controls Lights
100
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Switching on
With the ignition switched off, press the lever
either up or down past the resistance point for
approx. 2 seconds.
Switching off
Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in
the opposite direction.
Welcome lights and
headlight courtesy delay
feature
Welcome lights
General information
Depending on the equipment, when switching
off the vehicle, switch position
or .
Depending on the ambient brightness, individ‐
ual light functions may be switched on briefly,
when the vehicle is unlocked.
Activating/deactivating
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Welcome lights"
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Headlight courtesy delay feature
General information
The low beams stay lit for a short while after
the radio-ready state is switched off if the
lights are turned off and the headlight flasher is
switched on.
Setting the duration
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Pathway lighting:"
4. Set length of time.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Automatic headlamp control
The concept
The low beams are switched on and off auto‐
matically depending on the ambient bright‐
ness, for example in tunnels, in twilight or if
there is precipitation.
General information
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
When emerging from a tunnel during the day,
the low beams are not switched off immedi‐
ately but instead only after approx. 2 minutes.
The low beams always stay on when the fog
lamp is switched on.
Activating
Position of switch:
The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster is
illuminated, when the low beams are switched
on.
Seite 101
Lights Controls
101
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
System limits
The automatic headlamp control cannot serve
as a substitute for your personal judgment of
lighting conditions.
E.g. the sensors are unable to detect fog or
hazy weather. To avoid safety risks under
these conditions, you should always switch on
the lights manually.
Daytime running lights
General information
Position of switch:
, ,
The daytime running lights light up when the
ignition is switched on. After the ignition is
switched off, the parking lights light up in posi‐
tion .
Activating/deactivating
In some countries, daytime running lights are
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐
vate the daytime running lights.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Daytime running lamps"
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Adaptive Light Control
The concept
Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlight
control system that enables dynamic illumina‐
tion of the road surface.
General information
Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
rameters, the light from the headlamp follows
the course of the road.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐
tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv‐
er's side when the vehicle is at a standstill.
Depending on the equipment version, Adap‐
tive Light Control consists of one or several
systems:
▷ Cornering light, refer to page 102.
▷ Self-leveling headlights, refer to page 102.
Activating
Position of switch
with the ignition
switched on.
Cornering lights
The cornering lights are automatically
switched on depending on the steering angle
or the use of turn signals.
When driving in reverse, the cornering lights
may be automatically switched on regardless
of the steering angle.
Self-leveling headlights
The self-leveling headlights compensate for
acceleration and braking operations in order
not to blind the oncoming traffic and to achieve
optimum illumination of the roadway.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
Adaptive Light Control is malfunctioning or has
failed. Have the system immediately checked
by a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
High-beam Assistant
The concept
The high-beam Assistant detects other traffic
participants early on and automatically
switches the high beams on or off depending
on the traffic situation. The assistant ensures
that the high beams are switched on, when‐
ever the traffic situation allows. In the low
Seite 102
Controls Lights
102
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
speed range, the high beams are not switched
on by the system.
General information
The system responds to light from oncoming
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to
adequate illumination, for example, in towns
and cities.
The driver can intervene at any time and switch
the high beams on and off as usual.
Activating
1. Depending on the equipment, turn the light
switch into position or .
2. Press button on the turn signal lever, ar‐
row.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster is illuminated, when the low
beams are switched on.
The high beams are switched on and off auto‐
matically.
The blue indicator lamp in the instru‐
ment cluster lights up when the system
switches on the high beams.
Deactivating
The High-beam Assistant is deactivated when
manually switching the high beams on and off,
refer to page 75. To reactivate the High-beam
Assistant, press the button on the turn signal
lever.
System limits
The High-beam Assistant cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver's personal judgment of
when to use the high beams. Therefore, man‐
ually switch off the high beams in situations
where required to avoid a safety risk.
The system is not fully functional in the follow‐
ing situations, and driver intervention may be
necessary:
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such
as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders
and wagons; when driving close to train or
ship traffic; and at animal crossings.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres‐
sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on‐
coming traffic on highways.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the
presence of highly reflective signs.
▷ When the windshield behind the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with
stickers, etc.
Fog lights
Front fog lights
The parking lights or low beams must be
switched on.
Press button. The green indicator
lamp lights up.
If the automatic headlamp control, refer to
page 101, is activated, the low beams will
come on automatically when you switch on the
front fog lights.
When the high beams or headlight flasher are
activated, the front fog lights are not switched
on.
Seite 103
Lights Controls
103
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Instrument lighting
Adjusting
The parking lights or low beams
must be switched on to adjust
the brightness.
Adjust the brightness with the
thumbwheel.
Interior lights
General information
Depending on the equipment, the interior
lights, footwell lights, entry lamps, and cour‐
tesy lamps are controlled automatically.
Thumb wheel for the instrument lighting con‐
trols brightness of some of these features.
Overview
1 Interior lights
2 Reading lights
Switching the interior lights on and off
Press button.
To switch off permanently: press the button for
approx. 3 seconds.
Switch back on: press button.
Switching the reading lamps on and
off manually
Press button.
Reading lights are located at the front and rear
next to the interior lights.
Ambient light
Depending on the equipment, the lighting can
be individually adjusted in the interior for some
lights.
Selecting color scheme
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Ambient:"
4. Select desired setting.
Setting the brightness
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Brightness:"
4. Adjust the brightness.
Seite 104
Controls Lights
104
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Safety
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver
2 Front airbag, front passenger
3 Head airbag
4 Side airbag
5 Knee airbag
Front airbags
Front airbags help protect the driver and front
passenger by responding to frontal impacts in
which safety belts alone would not provide ad‐
equate restraint.
Side airbag
In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
side of the body in the chest and lap area.
Head airbag
In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports
the head.
Seite 105
Safety Controls
105
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Knee airbag
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal
impact.
Protective action
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐
tion, for example, in less severe accidents or
rear-end collisions.
Information for optimum effect of the
airbags
WARNING
If the seat position is incorrect or the de‐
ployment area of the airbags is impaired, the
airbag system cannot protect as intended or
cause additional injuries due to triggering.
There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Follow
the information on optimum protective effect
of the airbag system.◀
▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep
the risk of injury to your hands or arms as
low as possible when the airbag is trig‐
gered.
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit‐
ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and
legs in the floor area and does not support
them on the dashboard.
▷ There should be no persons, animals or
objects between an airbag and a person.
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐
bag cover panels, do not cover them or
modify them in any way.
▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front
passenger side must stay clear - do not at‐
tach adhesive labels or coverings and do
not attach brackets or cables, e. g., for GPS
devices or' mobile phones.
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area.
▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or
other objects on the front passenger seat
that are not specifically suited for seats
with integrated side airbags.
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as
jackets, over the backrests.
▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
nents or the wiring in the airbag system.
This also applies to steering wheel covers,
the dashboard, and the seats.
▷ Do not remove the airbag system.
Even when you follow all instructions very
closely, injury from contact with the airbags
cannot be fully ruled out in certain situations.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
short-term and, in most cases, temporary
hearing impairment in sensitive individuals.
Warnings and information on the airbags are
also found on the sun visors.
Functional readiness of the airbag
system
Information
WARNING
Individual components can be hot after
triggering of the airbag system. There is a a
risk of injury. Do not touch individual compo‐
nents.◀
WARNING
Improperly executed work can lead to
failure, malfunction or unintentional triggering
of the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc‐
tion, the airbag system could not trigger as in‐
tended in the event of an accident despite re‐
spective accident severity. There is a risk of
injury or danger to life. Have the airbag system
checked, repaired, dismantled and scrapped
by a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.◀
Seite 106
Controls Safety
106
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Correct function
When the ignition is switched on, the
warning lamp in the instrument cluster
lights up briefly and thereby indicates
the operational readiness of the entire airbag
system and the belt tensioner.
Airbag system malfunctioning
▷ Warning lamp does not come on when the
ignition is turned on.
▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously.
Automatic deactivation of the front-
seat passenger airbags
The concept
The system reads if the front passenger seat is
occupied by measuring the human body's re‐
sistance.
Front, knee and side airbag on the front pas‐
senger's side are either activated or deacti‐
vated.
Information
Before transporting a child on the front pas‐
senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in‐
structions for children on the front passenger
seat, see Children.
WARNING
To ensure the front-seat passenger air‐
bag function, it must be detected, whether a
person occupies the front passenger seat. The
entire seat cushion area must be used for this
purpose. There is a risk of injury or danger to
life. Make sure that the front passenger keeps
his or her feet in the floor area.◀
Malfunction of the automatic
deactivation system
When transporting older children and adults,
the front-seat passenger airbags may be deac‐
tivated in certain sitting positions. In this case,
the indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger
airbags lights up.
In this case, change the sitting position so that
the front-seat passenger airbags are activated
and the indicator lamp goes out.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear.
To enable correct recognition of the occupied
seat cushion.
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats
or other items to the front passenger seat
unless they are specifically determined to
be safe for use on the front passenger
seat.
▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
passenger seat if a child restraint system is
to be installed on it.
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
could press against the seat from below.
▷ No moisture in or on the seat.
Indicator lamp for the front-seat
passenger airbags
The indicator lamp for the front-seat passen‐
ger airbags indicates the operating state of the
front-seat passenger airbags.
The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ei‐
ther activated or deactivated.
▷ The indicator lamp lights up
when a child is properly
seated in a child restraint fix‐
ing system or when the seat
is empty. The airbags on the
Seite 107
Safety Controls
107
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
front passenger side are not
activated.
▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when,
for example, a correctly seated person of
sufficient size is detected on the seat. The
airbags on the front passenger side are ac‐
tivated.
Detected child seats
The system generally detects children seated
in a child seat, particularly in child seats re‐
quired by NHTSA when the vehicle was manu‐
factured. After installing a child seat, make
sure that the indicator lamp for the front-seat
passenger airbags lights up. This indicates
that the child seat has been detected and the
front-seat passenger airbags are not activated.
Strength of the driver's and front-seat
passenger airbag
The explosive power that activates driver's/
front passenger's airbags very much depends
on the positions of the driver's/front passeng‐
er's seat.
With a respective message appearing on Con‐
trol Display calibrate the front seats to keep
the accuracy of this function over the long-
term.
Calibrating the front seats
WARNING
There is risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
A corresponding message appears on the
Control Display.
1.
Press the switch and move the respective
seat all the way forward, until it stops.
2. Press the switch forward again. The seat
still moves forward slightly.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
The calibration procedure is completed when
the message on the Control Display disap‐
pears.
If the message continues to be displayed, re‐
peat the calibration.
If the message does not disappear after a re‐
peat calibration, have the system checked as
soon as possible.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
The concept
The system monitors tire inflation pressure in
the four mounted tires. The system warns you
if there is a significant loss of pressure in one
or more tires. For this purpose, sensors in the
tire valves measure the tire inflation pressure
and tire temperature.
Information
With use of the system observe further infor‐
mation found under Tire inflation pressure, re‐
fer to page 205.
Functional requirements
The system must have been reset with the
correct tire inflation pressure; otherwise, relia‐
ble signaling of tire inflation pressure loss is
not assured.
Reset the system after each adjustment of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
Always use wheels with TPM electronics to
ensure that the system will operate properly.
Status display
The current status of the Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play, for example, whether or not the TPM is
active.
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
Seite 108
Controls Safety
108
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)"
The status is displayed.
Status control display
Tire and system status are indicated by the
color of the wheels and a text message on the
Control Display.
All wheels green
System is active and will issue a warning rela‐
tive to the tire inflation pressures stored during
the last reset.
One wheel is yellow
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
the indicated tire.
All wheels are yellow
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
several tires.
Wheels, gray
The system cannot detect a flat tire due to a
malfunction.
Additional information
The status control display additionally shows
the current tire inflation pressures and, de‐
pending on the model, tire temperatures. It
shows the actual values read; they may vary
depending on driving style or weather condi‐
tions.
Carry out reset
Reset the system after each adjustment of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
On the Control Display and on the vehicle:
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Perform reset"
4. Start the engine - do not drive off.
5. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform
reset".
6. Drive away.
The wheels are displayed in gray and the sta‐
tus is displayed.
After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a
short period, the set tire inflation pressures are
accepted as reference values. The reset is
completed automatically while driving.
The progress of the reset is displayed.
After a successfully completed Reset, the
wheels on the Control Display are shown in
green and "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
active" is displayed.
You may interrupt this trip at any time. When
you continue the reset resumes automatically.
Messages
Required tire inflation pressure check
message
A Check Control message is displayed.
▷ The system has detected a wheel change,
but no reset was done.
▷ No reset was performed for the system.
The system therefore issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures before
the last reset.
▷ Inflation was not carried out according to
specifications.
A Check Control message is displayed.
▷ The tire inflation pressure has fallen below
the level of the last reset.
In these cases:
1.
Check the tire pressure and correct as
needed.
2. Reset the system.
Seite 109
Safety Controls
109
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Message in case of low tire pressure
The yellow warning lamp lights up.
A Check Control message is displayed.
▷ There is a tire inflation pressure loss.
▷ No reset was performed for the system.
The system therefore issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures before
the last reset.
In these cases:
1.
Reduce your speed and drive moderately.
Do not exceed a speed of
80 mph/130 km/h.
2. At the next opportunity, for example gas
station, check and if necessary correct the
tire inflation pressure in all four tires.
3. Reset the system.
Message in case of sharp tire inflation
pressure loss
The yellow warning lamp lights up.
In addition, a symbol with the affected
tires will be displayed in the Check
Control message.
▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire in‐
flation pressure.
▷ No reset was performed for the system.
The system therefore issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures before
the last reset.
In these cases:
1.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
normal tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 212, are la‐
beled with a circular symbol containing the
letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
WARNING
A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐
ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,
such as steering and braking response. Run-
flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is
risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if
the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires.
Follow the information on run-flat tires and
continued driving with these tires.◀
A low tire inflation pressure might turn on DSC
Dynamic Stability Control.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1.
Identify the damaged tire.
Check the air pressure in all four tires, e.g.
using the tire pressure gage of a tire repair
kit.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may
not have been initialized. In this case, initi‐
alize the system.
If identification of flat tire damage is not
possible, please contact a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
2.
Repair the flat tire, e.g. with a tire repair kit
or by changing the tire.
Use of tire sealant, for example, the Mobility
System, may damage the TPM wheel electron‐
ics. In this case, have the electronics checked
at the next opportunity and have them re‐
placed if needed.
Run-flat tires
Maximum speed
You may continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Seite 110
Controls Safety
110
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at
the next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is shown to be correct, it is possible that
the Tire Pressure Monitor did not perform
a reset. Then perform the reset.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
The possible driving distance with a flat tire
depends on cargo load, driving style and road
conditions.
A vehicle with an average load has a possible
driving range of approx. 50 miles/80 km.
A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differ‐
ently, for example, it has reduced lane stability
during braking, a longer braking distance and
different self-steering properties. Adjust your
driving style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering
maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for exam‐
ple, curbs, potholes, etc.
Because the possible driving distance de‐
pends on how the vehicle is used during the
trip, the actual distance may be shorter or lon‐
ger depending on the driving speed, road con‐
ditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.
WARNING
Your vehicle handles differently when a
run-flat tire is damaged and has low or missing
tire inflation pressure, e.g., your lane stability is
reduced when braking, braking distances are
longer and the self-steering properties will
change. There is risk of an accident.
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.◀
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐
cate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
the tire could come loose and cause an acci‐
dent.
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
System limits
The system does not function properly if a re‐
set has not been carried out, for example, a flat
tire is reported though tire inflation pressures
are correct.
The tire inflation pressure depends on the
tire's temperature. Driving or exposure to the
sun will increase the tire's temperature, thus
increasing the tire inflation pressure. The tire
inflation pressure is reduced when the tire
temperature falls again. These circumstances
may cause a warning when temperatures fall
very sharply.
The system cannot indicate sudden serious
tire damage caused by external circumstances.
Malfunction
The yellow warning lamp flashes and
then lights up continuously. A Check
Control message is displayed. No flat
tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be de‐
tected.
Examples and recommendations in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is
mounted: Have it checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop as needed.
▷ Malfunction: Have system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Seite 111
Safety Controls
111
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset.
Reset the system again.
▷ Interference through systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: After leav‐
ing the area of the interference, the system
automatically becomes active again.
Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
System
Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
should be checked monthly when cold and in‐
flated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐
ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also
been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi‐
cator to indicate when the system is not oper‐
ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica‐
tor is combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a malfunc‐
tion, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illumi‐
nated. This sequence will continue upon sub‐
sequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐
function exists. When the malfunction indicator
is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replace‐
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop‐
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell‐
tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels
on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
FTM Flat Tire Monitor
The concept
The system detects tire inflation pressure loss
on the basis of rotation speed differences be‐
tween the individual wheels while driving.
In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the
diameter and therefore the rotational speed of
the corresponding wheel changes. This will be
detected and reported as a flat tire.
The system does not measure the actual infla‐
tion pressure in the tires.
Functional requirements
The system must have been initialized when
the tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐
wise, reliable flagging of a flat tire is not as‐
sured. Initialize the system after each correc‐
tion of the tire inflation pressure and after
every tire or wheel change.
Status display
The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can
be displayed on the Control Display, for exam‐
ple, whether or not the FTM is active.
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor (FTM)"
The status is displayed.
Seite 112
Controls Safety
112
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Initialization
When initializing the once set inflation tire
pressures serve as reference values in order to
detect a flat tire. Initialization is started by con‐
firming the tire inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains.
On the Control Display:
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Perform reset"
4. Start the engine - do not drive off.
5. Start the initialization with "Perform reset".
6. Drive away.
The initialization is completed while driving,
which can be interrupted at any time.
The initialization automatically continues when
driving resumes.
Indication of a flat tire
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
Check Control message is displayed.
There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire
inflation pressure.
1.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
normal tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 212, are la‐
beled with a circular symbol containing the
letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
WARNING
A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐
ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,
such as steering and braking response. Run-
flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is
risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if
the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires.
Follow the information on run-flat tires and
continued driving with these tires.◀
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control is switched on if needed.
System limits
A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in all
four tires will not be recognized. Therefore,
check the tire inflation pressure regularly.
Sudden serious tire damage caused by exter‐
nal circumstances cannot be recognized in ad‐
vance.
The system could be delayed or malfunction in
the following situations:
▷ When the system has not been initialized.
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road
surface.
▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction
wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting).
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1.
Identify the damaged tire.
Check the air pressure in all four tires, e.g.
using the tire pressure gage of a tire repair
kit.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
the system.
If identification of flat tire damage is not
possible, please contact a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
2.
Repair the flat tire, e.g. with a tire repair kit
or by changing the tire.
Seite 113
Safety Controls
113
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Run-flat tires
Maximum speed
You may continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at
the next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
the system.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
The possible driving distance with a flat tire
depends on cargo load, driving style and road
conditions.
A vehicle with an average load has a possible
driving range of approx. 50 miles/80 km.
A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differ‐
ently, for example, it has reduced lane stability
during braking, a longer braking distance and
different self-steering properties. Adjust your
driving style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering
maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for exam‐
ple, curbs, potholes, etc.
Because the possible driving distance de‐
pends on how the vehicle is used during the
trip, the actual distance may be shorter or lon‐
ger depending on the driving speed, road con‐
ditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.
WARNING
Your vehicle handles differently when a
run-flat tire is damaged and has low or missing
tire inflation pressure, e.g., your lane stability is
reduced when braking, braking distances are
longer and the self-steering properties will
change. There is risk of an accident.
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.◀
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐
cate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
the tire could come loose and cause an acci‐
dent.
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Intelligent Safety
The concept
Intelligent Safety enables central operation of
the driver assistance system. Depending on
how the vehicle is equipped, Intelligent Safety
consists of one or more systems that can help
prevent a imminent collision.
▷ Front-end collision warning, refer to
page 115.
▷ Pedestrian warning, refer to page 121.
▷ Lane departure warning, refer to
page 124.
▷ Active Blind Spot Detection, refer to
page 126.
Information
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
the driver from personal responsibility. Due to
system limits, warnings or reactions of the sys‐
tem may not be output or they may be output
too late or incorrectly. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Adjust the driving style to the traffic con‐
ditions. Watch traffic closely and actively inter‐
vene in the respective situations.◀
Seite 114
Controls Safety
114
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
e.g., approach control warning with light brak‐
ing function. There is risk of an accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
tow-starting/towing.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Switching on/off
Some Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐
cally active after every departure. Some Intelli‐
gent Safety systems activate according to the
last setting.
Press button briefly:
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed. The systems
are individually switched off ac‐
cording to their respective set‐
tings.
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respec‐
tive to their individual settings.
Adjust as needed. Individual settings are
stored for the profile currently used.
Press button again:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
activated.
▷ The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
turned off.
▷ The LED goes out.
Front-end collision warning
Depending on the equipment, the collision
warning system consists of one of the two sys‐
tems:
▷ Front-end collision warning with City Brak‐
ing function, refer to page 115.
▷ Front-end collision warning with braking
function, refer to page 118
Front-end collision warning
with City Braking function
The concept
The system can help prevent accidents. If an
accident cannot be prevented, the system will
help reduce the collision speed.
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐
nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐
ently if needed.
The automatic braking intervention is done
with limited force and duration.
A camera in the area of the interior mirror con‐
trols the system.
The front-end collision warning is available
even if cruise control has been deactivated.
With the vehicle approaching another vehicle
intentionally, the collision warning and braking
are delayed in order to avoid false system re‐
actions.
General information
The system warns at two levels of an imminent
danger of collision at speeds from approx.
Seite 115
Safety Controls
115
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings may vary with
the current driving situation.
Appropriate braking kicks in at speeds of up to
35 mph/60 km/h.
Detection range
It responds to objects if they are detected by
the system.
Information
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
the driver from personal responsibility. Due to
system limits, warnings or reactions of the sys‐
tem may not be output or they may be output
too late or incorrectly. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Adjust the driving style to the traffic con‐
ditions. Watch traffic closely and actively inter‐
vene in the respective situations.◀
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
e.g., approach control warning with light brak‐
ing function. There is risk of an accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
tow-starting/towing.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving-off.
Switching on/off manually
Press button briefly:
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed. The systems
are individually switched off ac‐
cording to their respective set‐
tings.
Seite 116
Controls Safety
116
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respec‐
tive to their individual settings.
Adjust as needed. Individual settings are
stored for the profile currently used.
Press button again:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
activated.
▷ The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
turned off.
▷ The LED goes out.
Setting the warning time
The warning time can be set via iDrive.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Frontal Coll. Warning"
3. Activate the desired time on the Control
Display.
The selected time is stored for the profile cur‐
rently used.
Warning with braking function
Display
If a collision with a recognized vehicle is immi‐
nent a warning symbol appears in the instru‐
ment cluster and in the Head-Up Display.
Symbol Measure
Symbol lights up red: prewarning.
Brake and increase distance.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning.
You are requested to intervene by
braking or make an evasive maneu‐
ver.
Prewarning
This warning is issued, for example, when
there is the impending danger of a collision or
the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.
The driver must intervene actively when there
is a prewarning.
Acute warning with braking function
Acute warning in displayed in case of the immi‐
nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
proaches another object at a high differential
speed.
The driver must intervene actively when there
is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is
assisted by a minor automatic braking inter‐
vention in a possible risk of collision.
Acute warnings can also be triggered without
previous forewarning.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐
ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on
the brake pedal. The system can assist with
some braking intervention if there is a risk of a
collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus
come to a complete stop.
The braking intervention is executed only if ve‐
hicle stability has not been restricted, e.g. by
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
Object detection can be restricted. Limitations
of the detection range and functional restric‐
tions are to be considered.
Seite 117
Safety Controls
117
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
System limits
Information
WARNING
The system can react incorrectly or not
at all due to the system limits. There is risk of
accidents or risk of property damage. Observe
the information regarding the system limits
and actively intervene, if needed.◀
Detection range
The system's detection potential is limited.
Thus a system reaction might not come or
might come late.
E. g. the following situations may not be de‐
tected:
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
fall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
limited or deactivated, for example, DSC
OFF.
▷ If, depending on the vehicle equipment
version, the field of view of the camera in
the mirror or the radar sensor is dirty or ob‐
scured.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine, via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun
low in the sky.
Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings are,
for example the warning time, the more warn‐
ings are displayed. However, there may also be
an excess of false warnings.
Collision warning with
braking function
The concept
The system can help prevent accidents. If an
accident cannot be prevented, the system will
help reduce the collision speed.
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐
nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐
ently if needed.
The automatic braking intervention may be
executed with maximum braking force and for
a brief period only as necessary.
If the vehicle is equipped with Active Cruise
Control with Stop&Go, the front-end collision
warning is controlled via the cruise control ra‐
dar sensor in conjunction with a camera.
The front-end collision warning is available
even if cruise control has been deactivated.
With the vehicle approaching another vehicle
intentionally, the collision warning and braking
are delayed in order to avoid false system re‐
actions.
General information
The system issues a two-phase warning of a
possible danger of collision with vehicles at
speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. Time of
warnings may vary with the current driving sit‐
uation.
Seite 118
Controls Safety
118
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Detection range
It responds to objects if they are detected by
the system.
Information
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
the driver from personal responsibility. Due to
system limits, warnings or reactions of the sys‐
tem may not be output or they may be output
too late or incorrectly. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Adjust the driving style to the traffic con‐
ditions. Watch traffic closely and actively inter‐
vene in the respective situations.◀
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
e.g., approach control warning with light brak‐
ing function. There is risk of an accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
tow-starting/towing.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Radar sensor
The radar sensor is located in the lower area of
the front bumper.
Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐
structed.
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Seite 119
Safety Controls
119
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving-off.
Switching on/off manually
Press button briefly:
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed. The systems
are individually switched off ac‐
cording to their respective set‐
tings.
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respec‐
tive to their individual settings.
Adjust as needed. Individual settings are
stored for the profile currently used.
Press button again:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
activated.
▷ The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
turned off.
▷ The LED goes out.
Setting the warning time
The warning time can be set via iDrive.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Frontal Coll. Warning"
3. Activate the desired time on the Control
Display.
The selected time is stored for the profile cur‐
rently used.
Warning with braking function
Display
If a collision with a recognized vehicle is immi‐
nent a warning symbol appears in the instru‐
ment cluster and in the Head-Up Display.
Symbol Measure
Symbol lights up red: prewarning.
Brake and increase distance.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning.
You are requested to intervene by
braking or make an evasive maneu‐
ver.
Prewarning
This warning is issued, for example, when
there is the impending danger of a collision or
the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.
The driver must intervene actively when there
is a prewarning.
Acute warning with braking function
Acute warning in displayed in case of the immi‐
nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
proaches another object at a high differential
speed.
The driver must intervene actively when there
is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is
assisted by an automatic braking intervention
in a possible risk of collision.
Acute warnings can also be triggered without
previous forewarning.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐
ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on
the brake pedal. The system can assist with
automatic braking intervention if there is a risk
Seite 120
Controls Safety
120
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
of a collision. The intervention can bring the
vehicle to a complete stop.
The braking intervention is executed only if ve‐
hicle stability has not been restricted, e.g. by
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol.
Above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h the braking
intervention occurs as a brief braking pressure.
No automatic delay occurs.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
Object detection can be restricted. Limitations
of the detection range and functional restric‐
tions are to be considered.
System limits
Information
WARNING
The system can react incorrectly or not
at all due to the system limits. There is risk of
accidents or risk of property damage. Observe
the information regarding the system limits
and actively intervene, if needed.◀
Detection range
The system's detection potential is limited.
Thus a system reaction might not come or
might come late.
E. g. the following situations may not be de‐
tected:
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
fall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
limited or deactivated, for example, DSC
OFF.
▷ If, depending on the vehicle equipment
version, the field of view of the camera in
the mirror or the radar sensor is dirty or ob‐
scured.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine, via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun
low in the sky.
Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings are,
for example the warning time, the more warn‐
ings are displayed. However, there may also be
an excess of false warnings.
Person warning with City
light braking function
The concept
The system can help prevent accidents with
pedestrians.
The system issues a warning in the city driving
speed area if there is imminent danger of a col‐
lision with pedestrians and includes a braking
function.
The camera in the area of the interior mirror
controls the system.
General information
With sufficient brightness, the system warns
about possible collision danger with pedes‐
trians starting at approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to ap‐
Seite 121
Safety Controls
121
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
prox. 35 mph/60 km/h and assists with braking
before a collision.
Under those circumstances it reacts to people
who are within the detection range of the sys‐
tem.
Detection range
The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐
ided into two areas
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and
left.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐
cated within the central area. A warning is is‐
sued about pedestrians who are located within
the extended area only if they are moving in
the direction of the central area.
Information
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
the driver from personal responsibility. Due to
system limits, warnings or reactions of the sys‐
tem may not be output or they may be output
too late or incorrectly. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Adjust the driving style to the traffic con‐
ditions. Watch traffic closely and actively inter‐
vene in the respective situations.◀
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
e.g., approach control warning with light brak‐
ing function. There is risk of an accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
tow-starting/towing.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving-off.
Switching on/off manually
Press button briefly:
Seite 122
Controls Safety
122
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety system
is displayed. The systems are individually
switched off according to their respective
settings.
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respec‐
tive to their individual settings.
Adjust as needed. Individual settings are
stored for the profile currently used.
Press button again:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
activated.
▷ The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
turned off.
▷ The LED goes out.
Warning with braking function
Display
If a collision with a person detected in this way
is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the
instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.
The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐
nal sounds.
Intervene immediately by braking or make an
evasive maneuver.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐
ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on
the brake pedal. The system can assist with
some braking intervention if there is a risk of a
collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus
come to a complete stop.
The braking intervention is executed only if ve‐
hicle stability has not been restricted, e.g. by
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
Object detection can be restricted. Limitations
of the detection range and functional restric‐
tions are to be considered.
System limits
Information
WARNING
The system can react incorrectly or not
at all due to the system limits. There is risk of
accidents or risk of property damage. Observe
the information regarding the system limits
and actively intervene, if needed.◀
Detection range
The detection potential of the camera is lim‐
ited.
Thus a warning might not be issued or be is‐
sued late.
E. g. the following situations may not be de‐
tected:
▷ Partially covered pedestrians.
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such
because of the viewing angle or contour.
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than
32 inches/80 cm.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional or may
not be available in the following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
fall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
deactivated, for example DSC OFF.
Seite 123
Safety Controls
123
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the
windshield are dirty or covered.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine, via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, e.g., from the sun
low in the sky.
▷ When it is dark outside.
Lane departure warning
The concept
Starting at a specific speed, this system alerts
you when the vehicle on streets with lane
markings is about to leave the lane. This
speed, depending on the country version, is
between 35 mph/55 km/h and
45 mph/70 km/h.
The steering wheel begins vibrating gently in
the event of warnings. The time of the warning
may vary depending on the current driving sit‐
uation.
The system does not provide a warning if the
turn signal is set before leaving the lane.
Information
WARNING
The system does not release the driver
from the personal responsibility to correctly
assess route and traffic situation. There is risk
of an accident. Adjust the driving style to the
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene in the respective situations. In
the event of a warning, do not unnecessarily
jerk the steering wheel.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The lane departure warning is automatically
activated after departure, if the function was
switched on the last time the engine was stop‐
ped.
Switching on/off manually
Press button briefly:
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed. The systems
are individually switched off ac‐
Seite 124
Controls Safety
124
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
cording to their respective set‐
tings.
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respec‐
tive to their individual settings.
Adjust as needed. Individual settings are
stored for the profile currently used.
Press button again:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
activated.
▷ The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
turned off.
▷ The LED goes out.
Display in the instrument cluster
▷ Lines: system is activated.
▷ Arrows: at least one lane marking
was detected and warnings can be
issued.
Issued warning
If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has
been detected, the steering wheel begins vi‐
brating.
If the turn signal is set before changing the
lane, a warning is not issued.
End of warning
The warning is canceled in the following situa‐
tions:
▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.
▷ When returning to your own lane.
▷ When braking hard.
▷ When using the turn signal.
System limits
Information
WARNING
The system can react incorrectly or not
at all due to the system limits. There is risk of
accidents or risk of property damage. Observe
the information regarding the system limits
and actively intervene, if needed.◀
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visi‐
ble, merging, diverging, or multiple lane
markings such as in construction areas.
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow,
ice, dirt or water.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ When the lane markings are covered by
objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with
stickers, etc.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
Seite 125
Safety Controls
125
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Active Blind Spot Detection
The concept
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor
the area behind and next to the vehicle at
speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.
The system indicates whether there are vehi‐
cles in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching
from behind on the adjacent lane, arrow 2.
The lamp in the exterior mirror housing is dim‐
med.
Before you change lanes after setting the turn
signal, the system issues a warning in the sit‐
uations described above.
If there is a risk of collision: the lamp in the ex‐
terior mirror flashes and the steering wheel vi‐
brates.
Information
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess visi‐
bility and traffic situation. There is risk of an ac‐
cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
intervene in the respective situations.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located in the rear
bumper.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The Active Blind Spot Detection is automati‐
cally activated after departure, if the function
was switched on the last time the engine was
stopped.
Switching on/off manually
Press button briefly:
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed. The systems
are individually switched off ac‐
cording to their respective set‐
tings.
Seite 126
Controls Safety
126
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respec‐
tive to their individual settings.
Adjust as needed. Individual settings are
stored for the profile currently used.
Press button again:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
activated.
▷ The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
turned off.
▷ The LED goes out.
Display
Lamp in the exterior mirror housing
Prewarning
The dimmed lamp in the exterior mirror hous‐
ing indicates when there are vehicles in the
blind spot or approaching from behind.
Acute warning
If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the
critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates briefly
and the lamp in the exterior mirror housing
flashes brightly.
The warning stops when the turn signal is
switched off, or the other vehicle leaves the
critical zone.
Brief flashing
A brief flashing of the lamp during vehicle un‐
locking serves as system self-test.
System limits
Information
WARNING
The system can react incorrectly or not
at all due to the system limits. There is risk of
accidents or risk of property damage. Observe
the information regarding the system limits
and actively intervene, if needed.◀
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own.
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ If the bumper is dirty or iced up, or covered
with stickers.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
A Check Control message is displayed when
the system is not fully functional.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
▷ NBG009014A.
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐
ference, and
Seite 127
Safety Controls
127
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
▷ this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Brake force display
The concept
▷ During normal brake application, the outer
brake lights light up.
▷ During heavy brake application, the inner
brake lights light up in addition.
Seite 128
Controls Safety
128
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Anti-lock Braking System
ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking.
The vehicle contains its steering power even
during full brake applications, thus increasing
active safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
gine.
Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the greatest possible
braking force boost. It reduces the braking dis‐
tance to a minimum during emergency stop.
This system utilizes all of the benefits provided
by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the emergency stop.
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control
The concept
Within the physical limits, the system helps to
keep the vehicle on a steady course by reduc‐
ing engine speed and by applying brakes to
the individual wheels.
General information
Dynamic Stability Control detect for example
the following unstable driving conditions:
▷ Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteering.
▷ Loss of traction of the front wheels, which
can lead to understeering.
Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to
page 130, is a version of the DSC where for‐
ward momentum is optimized.
Information
The laws of physics cannot be repealed, not
even with DSC.
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐
spective situations.◀
WARNING
When driving with roof load, e.g., with
roof-mounted luggage rack, driving safety may
not be ensured in driving-critical situations due
to the elevated center of gravity. There is risk
of accidents or risk of property damage. Do not
deactivate Dynamic Stability Control DSC
when driving with roof load.◀
Seite 129
Driving stability control systems Controls
129
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Overview
Button in the vehicle
DSC OFF button
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐
trols the drive and braking forces.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has
failed.
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF
General information
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is
reduced during acceleration and when driving
in curves.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
again as soon as possible.
Deactivating DSC
Press and hold this button but not lon‐
ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the
indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐
strument cluster and displays DSC OFF.
DSC is switched off.
The steering and, depending on the equip‐
ment, suspension are tuned for sporty driving.
Activating DSC
Press button.
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator lamp go
out.
Indicator/warning lights
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is
deactivated.
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control
The concept
DTC is a version of the DSC where forward
momentum is optimized.
The system ensures maximum headway on
special road conditions or loose road surfaces,
for example unplowed snowy roads, but with
somewhat limited driving stability.
When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maxi‐
mum traction. Driving stability is limited during
acceleration and when driving in curves.
Therefore drive with appropriate caution.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC
under the following special circumstances:
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared,
snow-covered roads.
▷ When freeing vehicle from deep snow or
driving off from loose grounds.
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic
Traction Control
Activating DTC
Press button.
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC
OFF lights up.
Seite 130
Controls Driving stability control systems
130
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Deactivating DTC
Press button again.
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica‐
tor lamp go out.
Performance Control
Performance Control enhances the agility of
the vehicle.
To increase maneuverability, with a corre‐
spondingly sporty driving style, wheels are
braked individually. The resulting braking
power is simultaneously largely compensated
by an engine intervention.
xDrive
xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve‐
hicle. Concerted action by the xDrive and DSC
further optimize traction and driving dynamics.
The xDrive all-wheel-drive system variably dis‐
tributes the drive forces to the front and rear
axles as demanded by the driving situation and
road surface.
Display on the Control Display
Displaying xDrive view
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "xDrive status"
The following information is displayed:
▷ With a navigation system: compass display
for the driving direction
▷ Pitch attitude with degree and percentage.
▷ Transverse gradient with degree indica‐
tion.
▷ Graphic display for the steering.
HDC Hill Descent Control
The concept
HDC is a downhill driving assistant that auto‐
matically controls vehicle speed on steep
downhill gradients. Without applying the
brakes, the vehicle moves at slightly more than
walking speed. It the brakes are actively ap‐
plied, the system distributes force according to
the traction.
Vehicle stability and maneuverability are im‐
proved on downhill gradients.
Hill Descent Control can be activated at
speeds below approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. When
driving downhill, the vehicle reduces its speed
and then keeps its speed constant.
Only use HDC in low gears or in selector lever
position D or R.
Increasing or decreasing vehicle
speed
Specify desired speed in the range from ap‐
prox. 4 mph/6 km/h to approx. 15 mph/25 km/h
using the rocker switch of the cruise control on
the steering wheel. Vehicle speed can be
changed by lightly accelerating.
▷ Press the rocker switch up to the point of
resistance: the speed increases gradually.
▷ Press up the rocker switch past the point
of resistance: the speed increases while
the rocker switch is pressed.
▷ Press the rocker switch down to the point
of resistance: the speed decreases gradu‐
ally.
Seite 131
Driving stability control systems Controls
131
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
▷ Press the rocker switch down past the
point of resistance: when driving forward,
the speed decreases to approx.
6 mph/10 km/h; when reversing, the speed
decreases to approx. 4 mph/6 km/h.
Activating HDC
Press button; the LED above the button
lights up.
Deactivating HDC
Press button again. The LED goes out.
HDC is automatically deactivated above
approx. 37 mph/60 km/h.
Display in the instrument cluster
The selected speed is displayed
in the speedometer.
▷ Green: the system is actively
braking the vehicle.
▷ Orange: the system is on
standby.
Malfunction
A message is displayed in the instrument clus‐
ter. HDC is not available, for example, due to
elevated brake temperatures.
Dynamic Damping Control
The concept
This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo‐
tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav‐
eling on uneven road surfaces.
The system enhances driving dynamics and
comfort fitting road surface and driving style.
Programs
The system offers several different programs.
The programs can be selected via Driving Dy‐
namics Control.
SPORT
Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐
sorbers for greater driving agility.
SPORT+
Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐
sorbers for greater driving agility when driving
with limited driving stabilization.
COMFORT/ECO PRO
Balanced control of the vehicle.
Variable sport steering
The variable sport steering increases the
steering angle of the front wheels at large
steering wheel angles, for example, in tight
curves or when parking. Steering becomes
more direct.
It also varies the force required to turn the
wheels in accordance with the vehicle speed.
This results in a sporty steering response. In
addition, it becomes easier to steer during
parking and maneuvering.
Seite 132
Controls Driving stability control systems
132
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Servotronic
The concept
The Servotronic varies the steering force re‐
quired to turn the wheels in accordance with
the vehicle speed. At low speeds, the steering
force is strongly supported, i. e. during steer‐
ing, low force is required. As the speed in‐
creases, the assistance of the steering force is
reduced.
Furthermore, the steering force adapts accord‐
ing to the driving program, so that a direct,
sporty feel and/or comfortable steering is con‐
veyed.
Driving Dynamics Control
The concept
The Driving Dynamics Control helps to fine-
tune the vehicle's settings and features. Vari‐
ous programs can be selected for this purpose.
The Driving Dynamics Control and the DSC
OFF buttons can each be used to activate a
program.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Operating the programs
Press button Program
DSC OFF
TRACTION
SPORT+
SPORT
COMFORT
ECO PRO
Automatic program change
The system may automatically switch to COM‐
FORT in the following situations:
▷ Failure of Dynamic Damping Control.
▷ Failure of DSC Dynamic Stability Control.
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
▷ When activating cruise control in TRAC‐
TION or DSC OFF mode.
DSC OFF
When DSC OFF, refer to page 130, is active,
driving stability is limited during acceleration
and when driving in curves.
TRACTION
When TRACTION is active, the vehicle has
maximum traction on loose road surfaces. DTC
Dynamic Traction Control, refer to page 130, is
activated. Driving stability is limited during ac‐
celeration and when driving in curves.
SPORT+
Sporty driving with optimized chassis and sus‐
pension and adjusted drivetrain with limited
driving stabilization.
Dynamic Traction Control is switched on.
The driver handles several of the stabilization
tasks.
Seite 133
Driving stability control systems Controls
133
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Activating SPORT+
Press button repeatedly until SPORT+
appears in the instrument cluster and
the DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up.
Automatic program change
When activating cruise control, the program
automatically switches to SPORT mode.
Indicator/warning lights
SPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster.
The DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up:
Dynamic Traction Control is activated.
SPORT
Consistently sporty tuning of the suspension
and drivetrain for greater driving agility with
maximum driving stabilization.
The program can be configured to individual
specifications. The configuration is stored for
the profile currently used.
Activating SPORT
Press button repeatedly until SPORT
is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Configuring SPORT
When the display is activated on the Control
Display, refer to page 135, the SPORT driving
mode can be set to individual specifications.
▷ Activating SPORT.
▷ "Configure SPORT"
▷ Configuring the SPORT driving mode.
SPORT can also be configured before it is acti‐
vated:
1.
"Settings"
2. "SPORT mode"
3. Configure driving mode.
This configuration is retrieved when the
SPORT driving mode is activated.
COMFORT
For a balanced tuning with maximum driving
stabilization.
Activating COMFORT
Press button repeatedly until COM‐
FORT is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
In certain situations, the system automatically
changes to the NORMAL program, automatic
program change, refer to page 133.
ECO PRO
ECO PRO, refer to page 190, provides consis‐
tent tuning to minimize fuel consumption for
maximum range with maximum driving stabili‐
zation.
Comfort functions and the engine Controller
are adjusted.
The program can be configured to individual
specifications.
Activating ECO PRO
Press button repeatedly until ECO
PRO is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Configuring ECO PRO
1.
Activate ECO PRO.
2. "Configure ECO PRO"
Make the desired settings.
Configuring driving program
Settings can be made for the following driving
programs in Driving mode:
▷ SPORT, refer to page 134.
▷ ECO PRO, refer to page 191.
Seite 134
Controls Driving stability control systems
134
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Displays
Program selection
Pressing the button displays a
list of the selectable programs.
Depending on your vehicle's op‐
tional features, the list in the in‐
strument cluster can differ from
the illustration shown.
Selected program
The instrument cluster displays
the selected program.
Display on the Control Display
Program changes can be displayed on the
Control Display.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Control display"
3. "Driving mode info"
Drive-off assistant
The concept
This system supports driving off on inclines.
The parking brake is not required.
Driving off with the drive-off assistant
1.
Hold the vehicle in place with the foot
brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive off with‐
out delay.
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
Depending on the vehicle load, the vehicle may
roll back slightly.
Seite 135
Driving stability control systems Controls
135
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Active Cruise Control with
Stop&Go function, ACC
The concept
Using this system, a desired speed and a dis‐
tance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted using
the buttons on the steering wheel.
The system maintains the desired speed on
clear roads. For this purpose, the vehicles ac‐
celerates or brakes automatically.
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system
adjusts the speed of your vehicle within the
given system limits so that the set distance to
the vehicle ahead is maintained.
The distance can be adjusted in several steps.
For safety reasons, it depends on the repective
speed.
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and
then proceeds to drive again within a brief pe‐
riod, the system is able to detect this within the
given system limits.
General information
Depending on the driving settings, the features
of the cruise control can change in certain
areas.
Information
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐
spective situations.◀
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
WARNING
The desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐
justed or called up by mistake. There is risk of
an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene in the respective situations.◀
WARNING
Risk of accident due to too high speed
differences to other vehicles, e.g., in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving
vehicle.
▷ Suddenly swerving vehicle onto the own
lane.
Seite 136
Controls Driving comfort
136
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
▷ When fast approaching standing vehicles.
There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐
spective situations.◀
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Press but‐
ton
Function
Cruise control on/off, interrupt,
refer to page 137
Store, maintain speed, refer to
page 138
Call up speed, continue cruise
control, refer to page 139
Reduce distance, refer to
page 139
Increase distance, refer to
page 139
Rocker switch:
Set speed, refer to page 138
Radar sensor
A radar sensor is located in the front bumper
for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the
vehicle.
Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐
structed.
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior mirror clean and clear.
A dirty or covered area in front of the interior
mirror may hinder the detection of vehicles.
If necessary, clean the area in front of the inte‐
rior mirror, for example, carefully remove salt
residue in the winter.
Functional requirements
Speed range
The system is best used on well-constructed
roads.
The minimum speed that can be set is
20 mph/30 km/h. The maximum speed that
can be set depends on the vehicle.
The system can also be activated when sta‐
tionary.
Switching on/off and interrupting
cruise control
Switching on
Press button on the steering wheel.
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster
light up and the mark in the speedometer is set
to the current speed.
Cruise control can be used.
DSC will be switched on if needed.
Seite 137
Driving comfort Controls
137
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Switching off
To switch off the system while standing, step
on brake pedal at the same time.
Press button on the steering wheel.
▷ If active: press twice.
▷ If interrupted: press once.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
is deleted.
Interrupting manually
Press button on the steering wheel.
If interrupting the system while stationary,
press on the brake pedal at the same time.
Automatic interruption
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
▷ When selector lever position D is disen‐
gaged.
▷ When DTC is activated or DSC is deacti‐
vated.
▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability.
▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving
Dynamics Control.
▷ If the safety belt and the driver's door are
opened while the vehicle is standing still.
▷ If the system has not detected objects for
an extended period, for example, on a road
with very little traffic without curb or
shoulder markings.
▷ If the detection range of the radar is dis‐
rupted, for example, by dirt or heavy fog.
▷ After a longer stationary period when the
vehicle has been braked to a stop by the
system.
Setting the speed
Maintaining/storing the speed
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
terrupted.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
The stored speed is displayed in the speedom‐
eter and briefly in the instrument cluster, refer
to page 139.
DSC will be switched on if needed.
The speed can also be stored by
pressing a button.
Press button.
Changing the speed
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
road is clear.
Seite 138
Controls Driving comfort
138
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed
past the point of resistance, the desired
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the
action.
Adjusting distance
Information
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility. Due to the system lim‐
its, braking can be late. There is risk of acci‐
dents or risk of property damage. Be aware to
the traffic situation at all times. Adjust the dis‐
tance to the traffic and weather conditions and
maintain the prescribed safety distance, possi‐
bly by braking.◀
Reduce distance
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
sired distance is set.
Instrument cluster will display selected dis‐
tance, refer to page 139.
Increase distance
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
sired distance is set.
Instrument cluster will display selected dis‐
tance, refer to page 139.
Continuing cruise control
General information
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed.
In the following cases, the stored speed value
is deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off.
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
Information
Make sure that the difference between current
speed and stored speed is not too large before
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unin‐
tentional braking or accelerating may occur.
Calling up stored speed and distance
Press button with the system
switched on.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Desired speed and stored speed
▷ Marking lights up green:
system is active, the mark‐
ing indicates the desired
speed.
▷ Marking lights up orange:
system is interrupted, the
marking indicates the stored
speed.
▷ The marking does not light up: the system
is switched off.
Brief status display
Selected desired speed.
If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the
conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐
rently fulfilled.
Distance to vehicle ahead of you
Shown is selected distance to the vehicle driv‐
ing ahead of you.
Seite 139
Driving comfort Controls
139
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Distance display
Distance 1
Distance 2
Distance 3
Distance 4
This value is set automatically after
the system is switched on.
The system has been interrupted or
distance control is temporarily sup‐
pressed because the accelerator
pedal is being pressed; a vehicle
was not detected.
Distance control is temporarily sup‐
pressed because the accelerator
pedal is being pressed; a vehicle
was detected.
Detected vehicle
Symbol lights up orange:
A vehicle has been detected ahead of
you.
Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has driven
away.
ACC does not accelerate. To accelerate, acti‐
vate ACC, e.g., by briefly stepping on the ac‐
celerator pedal, pressing the RES button or
rocker switch.
Indicator/warning lights
Symbol flashes orange:
The conditions are not adequate for
the system to work.
The system was deactivated but applies the
brakes until you actively resume control by
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator
pedal.
Symbol flashes red and a signal
sounds:
You are requested to intervene by
braking or make an evasive maneuver.
Displays in the Head-up Display
Some system information can also be dis‐
played in the Head-up Display.
Distance information
The symbol is displayed when the dis‐
tance from the vehicle traveling ahead
is too short.
The distance information is active under the
following circumstances:
▷ Active Cruise Control switched off.
▷ Display in the Head-up Display selected,
refer to page 98.
▷ Distance too short.
▷ Speed greater than approx.
40 mph/70 km/h.
System limits
Detection range
The detection capacity of the system and the
automatic braking capacity are limited.
Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not
be detected.
Seite 140
Controls Driving comfort
140
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Deceleration
The system does not decelerate in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ For pedestrians or similarly slow-moving
road users.
▷ For red traffic lights.
▷ For cross traffic.
▷ For oncoming traffic.
Swerving vehicles
A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected
until it is completely within the same lane as
your vehicle.
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
swerves into your lane, the system may not be
able to automatically restore the selected dis‐
tance. This also applies to major speed differ‐
ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, for ex‐
ample, when rapidly approaching a truck.
When a vehicle driving ahead of you is reliably
detected, the system requests that the driver
intervene by braking and carrying out evasive
maneuvers, if needed.
Cornering
If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the
speed is reduced slightly, although curves can‐
not be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive
into a curve at an appropriate speed.
In tight curves the system offers only restricted
detection where a vehicle ahead of you might
be detected late or not at all.
When you approach a curve the system may
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to
the bend of the curve. If the system deceler‐
ates you may compensate it by briefly acceler‐
ating.
After releasing the gas pedal the system is re‐
activated and controls speed independently.
Driving away
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off
automatically; for example:
▷ On steep inclines.
▷ From behind bumps in the road.
In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.
Seite 141
Driving comfort Controls
141
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Weather
In the event of unfavorable weather and light
conditions, e. g. if there is rain, snowfall, slush,
fog or glare, this may result in poorer recogni‐
tion of vehicles as well as short-term interrup‐
tions for vehicles that are already detected.
Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic
situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for
example by braking, steering or evading.
Engine power
The desired speed is also maintained downhill,
but may not be maintained on uphill grades if
engine power is insufficient.
Malfunction
The system cannot be activated if the radar
sensor is not aligned correctly. This may be
caused by damage incurred during parking, for
example.
A Check Control message is displayed if the
system fails.
The function for detecting and responding
when approaching stationary vehicles may be
limited in the following situations:
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ If the camera is malfunctioning or dirty. A
Check Control message is displayed.
Cruise control
The concept
Using this system, a desired speed can be ad‐
justed using the buttons on the steering wheel.
The system maintains the desired speed. The
system accelerates and brakes automatically
as needed.
General information
Depending on the driving settings, the features
of the cruise control can change in certain
areas.
Information
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐
spective situations.◀
WARNING
The use of the system can lead to an in‐
creased risk of accidents in the following situa‐
tions:
▷ On winding roads.
▷ In heavy traffic.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or
on a loose road surface.
There is risk of accidents or risk of property
damage. Only use the system if driving at con‐
stant speed is possible.◀
WARNING
The desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐
justed or called up by mistake. There is risk of
an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene in the respective situations.◀
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Press but‐
ton
Function
Cruise control on/off, interrupt‐
ing, refer to page 143.
Store speed, refer to
page 143.
Seite 142
Controls Driving comfort
142
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Press but‐
ton
Function
Call up speed, continue cruise
control, refer to page 144.
Rocker switch: adjust speed,
refer to page 143.
Switching on/off and interrupting
cruise control
Switching on
Press button on the steering wheel.
The marking in the speedometer is set to the
current speed.
Cruise control can be used.
DSC will be switched on if needed.
Switching off
Press button on the steering wheel.
▷ If active: press twice.
▷ If interrupted: press once.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
is deleted.
Interrupting manually
When active, press the button on the
steering wheel.
Automatic interruption
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
▷ If the clutch pedal is depressed for a few
seconds or released while a gear is not en‐
gaged.
▷ If the gear engaged is too high for the cur‐
rent speed.
▷ When selector lever position D is disen‐
gaged.
▷ When DTC is activated or DSC is deacti‐
vated.
▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability.
▷ If HDC is activated.
▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving
Dynamics Control.
Setting the speed
Maintaining/storing the speed
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
terrupted.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
The stored speed is displayed in the speedom‐
eter and briefly in the instrument cluster, refer
to page 144.
DSC will be switched on if needed.
The speed can also be stored by pressing a
button.
Press button.
Seite 143
Driving comfort Controls
143
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Changing the speed
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
road is clear.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed
past the point of resistance, the desired
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
The maximum speed that can be set de‐
pends on the vehicle.
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resist‐
ance point and holding it accelerates or de‐
celerates the vehicle without requiring
pressure on the accelerator pedal.
After the rocker switch is released, the ve‐
hicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the
switch beyond the resistance point causes
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.
Continuing cruise control
General information
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed.
In the following cases, the stored speed value
is deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off.
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
Information
Make sure that the difference between current
speed and stored speed is not too large before
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unin‐
tentional braking or accelerating may occur.
Calling up stored speed
Press button on the steering wheel.
The stored speed is reached and maintained.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Indicator lamp
Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐
ped, the indicator lamp in the instru‐
ment cluster indicates whether the sys‐
tem is switched on.
Desired speed and stored speed
▷ Marking lights up green:
system is active, the mark‐
ing indicates the desired
speed.
▷ Marking lights up orange:
system is interrupted, the
marking indicates the stored
speed.
▷ The marking does not light up: the system
is switched off.
Brief status display
Selected desired speed.
If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the
conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐
rently fulfilled.
Seite 144
Controls Driving comfort
144
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Displays in the Head-up Display
Some system information can also be dis‐
played in the Head-up Display.
System limits
Engine power
The desired speed is also maintained downhill,
but may not be maintained on uphill grades if
engine power is insufficient.
PDC Park Distance Control
The concept
PDC is a support when parking. When you
slowly approach an object in the rear - or also
in the front of the vehicle if the feature is availa‐
ble - then the object is reported through:
▷ Signal tones.
▷ Visual display.
General information
Ultrasound sensors in the bumpers measure
the distances from objects.
The maneuvering range, depending on the ob‐
stacle and environmental conditions, is approx.
6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given with the fol‐
lowing circumstances:
▷ By the front sensors and the two rear cor‐
ner sensors at approx. 24 inches/60 cm.
▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx.
5 ft/1.50 m.
▷ When a collision is imminent.
Information
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐
spective situations.◀
WARNING
Due to high speeds when PDC is acti‐
vated, the warning can be delayed due to
physical circumstances. There is a risk of injury
or risk of property damage. Avoid approaching
an object too fast. Avoid driving off fast while
PDC is not yet active.◀
Overview
With front PDC: button in vehicle
Park assistance button
Ultrasound sensors
Ultrasound sensors of the PDC,
for example in the bumpers.
Functional requirements
To ensure full functionality:
▷ Do not cover sensors, for example, with
stickers, bicycle racks.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
To clean: when using high-pressure washers,
do not spray the sensors for long periods and
maintain a distance of at least 12 in‐
ches/30 cm.
Seite 145
Driving comfort Controls
145
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
PDC switches on automatically in the following
situations:
▷ If selector lever position R is engaged
when the engine is running.
The rearview camera also switches on.
▷ If equipped with front PDC: when obsta‐
cles are detected behind or in front of the
vehicle by PDC and the speed is slower
than approx. 2.5 mph/4 km/h.
You may turn off automatic activation:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Parking"
3. Select setting.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
If necessary, switch off automatic PDC activa‐
tion on obstacle detection, for example in car
washes, to reduce false alarms.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if needed.
With front PDC: switching on/off
manually
Press park assistance button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The rearview camera image is displayed when
the reverse gear is engaged when pressing the
park assistance button.
Display
Signal tones
When approaching an object, an intermittent
sound indicates the position of the object. E.g.
if an object is detected to the left rear of the
vehicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear
speaker.
The shorter the distance to the object, the
shorter the intervals.
If the distance to a detected object is less than
approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a continuous tone is
sounded.
With front PDC: if objects are located both in
front of and behind the vehicle, an alternating
continuous signal is sounded.
The signal tone is switched off, when selector
lever position P is engaged on vehicles with
Steptronic transmission.
Volume
The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to the
entertainment volume can be adjusted.
1.
"Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Volume settings"
4. "PDC"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐
ting is selected.
6. Press the Controller.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object can
be shown on the Control Display. Objects that
are farther away are already displayed on the
Control Display before a signal sounds.
A display appears as soon as Park Distance
Control (PDC) is activated.
The range of the sensors is represented in the
colors green, yellow and red.
Seite 146
Controls Driving comfort
146
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
played, the switch can be made to PDC:
"Rear view camera"
System limits
Information
WARNING
The system can react incorrectly or not
at all due to the system limits. There is risk of
accidents or risk of property damage. Observe
the information regarding the system limits
and actively intervene, if needed.◀
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measuring might not function under
the following circumstances:
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for ex‐
ample coats.
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐
sound, for example from passing vehicles
or loud machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐
aged or out of position.
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐
treme heat or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges or cargo.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
Low objects already displayed, for example,
curbs, can move into the blind area of the sen‐
sors before or after a continuous tone sounds.
False warnings
PDC may issue a warning under the following
conditions even though there is no obstacle
within the detection range:
▷ In heavy rain.
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered
with ice.
▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
▷ On rough road surfaces.
▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed
bumps.
▷ In large buildings with right angles and
smooth walls, for example, in underground
garages.
▷ In automatic car washes.
▷ Through heavy pollution.
▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, for exam‐
ple, sweeping machines, high pressure
steam cleaners or neon lights.
If necessary, switch off automatic PDC activa‐
tion on obstacle detection, for example in car
washes, to reduce false alarms.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The range of the sensors is shown as a shaded
area on the Control Display.
PDC has failed. Have the system checked.
Surround View
The concept
Surround View comprises various camera as‐
sistance systems that help the driver when
parking, maneuvering, and at complex exits
and intersections.
▷ Rearview camera, refer to page 148.
Seite 147
Driving comfort Controls
147
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
▷ Top View, refer to page 150.
▷ Side View, refer to page 152.
Rearview camera
The concept
The rearview camera provides assistance in
parking and maneuvering backwards. The area
behind the vehicle is shown on the Control
Display.
Information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. There is risk of an accident.
Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐
tions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings
closely and actively intervene in the respective
situations.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Camera
The camera lens is located in the handle of the
tailgate. The image quality may be impaired by
dirt.
Clean the camera lens, refer to page 246.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
With the engine running, engage lever in posi‐
tion P R.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if needed.
Switching on/off manually
Press park assistance button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The PDC is shown on the Control Display.
The rearview camera image is displayed if the
reverse gear is engaged when pressing the
park assistance button.
Switching the view via iDrive
With PDC activated or Top View switched on:
"Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed.
Seite 148
Controls Driving comfort
148
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Display on the Control Display
Functional requirement
▷ The rearview camera is switched on.
▷ The tailgate is fully closed.
▷ Keep the recording range of the camera
clear. Protruding cargo or carrier systems
and trailers that are not connected to a
trailer power socket can lead to malfunc‐
tions.
Activating assistance functions
More than one assistance function can be ac‐
tive at the same time.
▷ Parking aid lines
"Parking aid lines"
Lanes and turning radius are indicated.
▷ Obstacle marking
"Obstacle marking"
Spatially-shaped markings are displayed.
Pathway lines
Pathway lines can be superimposed on the im‐
age of the rearview camera.
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space
required when parking and maneuvering on
level roads.
Pathway lines depend on the current steering
angle and are continuously adjusted to the
steering wheel movements.
Turning circle lines
Turning circle lines can only be superimposed
on the rearview camera image together with
pathway lines.
Turning circle lines show the course of the
smallest possible turning radius on a level
road.
Only one turning radius line is displayed after
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an‐
gle.
Obstacle marking
Obstacles behind the vehicle are detected by
the PDC sensors and, when respectively
equipped, detected by the rearview camera.
Obstacle markings can be faded into the image
of the rearview camera.
Their colored margins of the obstacle mark‐
ings match the markings of the PDC.
Seite 149
Driving comfort Controls
149
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Parking using pathway and turning
radius lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning ra‐
dius lines lead to within the limits of the
parking space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the pathway line covers the corresponding
turning radius line.
Display settings
Brightness
With the rearview camera switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐
ting is reached, and press the Controller.
Contrast
With the rearview camera switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐
ting is reached, and press the Controller.
System limits
Detection of objects
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system.
Assistance functions also take into account
data of the PDC.
Follow instructions in the PDC chapter.
The objects displayed on the Control Display
under certain circumstances are closer than
they appear. Do not estimate the distance from
the objects on the display.
Top View
The concept
Top View provides assistance in parking and
maneuvering. The area around the vehicle is
shown on the Control Display.
General information
The image is captured by two cameras inte‐
grated in the exterior mirrors, by the rearview
camera and a camera on the front of the vehi‐
cle.
The range is no more than approx. 6.5 ft/2 m to
the side, front and rear.
Obstacles within this range are thus displayed
early on the Control Display.
Information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. There is risk of an accident.
Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐
tions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings
closely and actively intervene in the respective
situations.◀
Seite 150
Controls Driving comfort
150
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Cameras
Front camera
The lenses of the Top View cameras are lo‐
cated at the bottom of the exterior mirror hous‐
ings. The image quality may be impaired by
dirt.
Clean the camera lenses, refer to page 246.
Functional requirements
Top View can be used only to a limited extent
in the following situations:
▷ With a door open.
▷ With the tailgate open.
▷ With an exterior mirror folded in.
▷ In poor light.
The unavailable camera range is depicted by
shading.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
With the engine running, engage lever in posi‐
tion P R.
The rearview camera image is displayed. To
switch to the Top View:
"Rear view camera"
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if needed.
Switching on/off manually
Press park assistance button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Top View is displayed.
The rearview camera image is displayed if the
reverse gear is engaged when pressing the
park assistance button.
Display
Display on the Control Display
The area surrounding the vehicle can be dis‐
played on the Control Display.
Seite 151
Driving comfort Controls
151
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
The display appears as soon as Top View is
activated.
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
played, it is possible to switch to top view:
"Rear view camera"
Brightness
With Top View switched on:
1. Select the symbol.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐
ting is reached, and press the Controller.
Contrast
With Top View switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐
ting is reached, and press the Controller.
Displaying the turning radius and
pathway lines
▷ The static, red turning radius line shows
the space needed to the side of the vehicle
when the steering wheel is turned all the
way.
▷ The variable, green pathway line assists
you in assessing the amount of space ac‐
tually needed to the side of the vehicle.
The lane line depends on the engaged
gear and the current steering angle. The
track line is continuously adjusted for the
steering wheel movement.
"Parking aid lines"
Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed.
System limits
A Check Control message is displayed when a
camera is not working.
Side View
The concept
Side View provides an early look at cross traffic
at blind driveways and intersections. Road
users concealed by obstacles to the left and
right of the vehicle can only be detected rela‐
tively late from the driver's seat. To improve
the viewing, each camera, front and rear on the
vehicle, detects the traffic area on the side.
Which camera is active is shown on the top
edge of the screen.
Information
The images of the cameras are displayed, de‐
pending on the gear selected, on the Control
Display.
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. There is risk of an accident.
Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐
tions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings
closely and actively intervene in the respective
situations.◀
Seite 152
Controls Driving comfort
152
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Side View
Cameras
Front camera
Rear camera
Two cameras are used for the detection.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt.
Clean the camera lenses, refer to page 246.
Switching on/off
Switching on/off manually
Press button.
Depending on the transmission position, the
picture of the front or rear camera is displayed.
Switching off automatically
By switching into a different function or when
changing gears.
Front Side View: when a certain driving dis‐
tance or speed is exceeded.
Display
General information
The traffic area in front of or behind the vehicle
is displayed on the Control Display.
Brightness
With the Side View switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐
ting is reached, and press the Controller.
Contrast
With the Side View switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐
ting is reached, and press the Controller.
Warning of crossing traffic
The concept
When an object approaching from the side is
detected by the front or rear camera, this is de‐
picted by a symbol in the Side View display.
Requirements
▷ Side View switched on.
Seite 153
Driving comfort Controls
153
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
▷ Your vehicle moves no faster than walking
speed.
▷ To detect approaching objects, sufficient
brightness, for example, daylight is neces‐
sary.
Display
The yellow symbol is displayed if an
approaching vehicle is detected by the
camera.
A gray symbol is displayed if crossing
traffic cannot be detected.
System limits
In the following situations, the warning about
crossing traffic may be limited:
▷ In poor lighting or visibility conditions.
▷ If the camera is soiled or covered.
System limits
The objects displayed on the Control Display
under certain circumstances are closer than
they appear. Therefore, do not estimate the
distance from the objects on the display.
The viewing angle is approx. 180°.
Parking assistant
The concept
This system assists the driver in parking paral‐
lel to the road.
Parking assistant handling is divided into three
steps:
▷ Switching on and activating.
▷ Parking space search.
▷ Parking.
System status and instructions on required ac‐
tions are displayed on the Control Display.
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces
on both sides of the vehicle.
The parking assistant calculates the best pos‐
sible parking line and takes control of steering
during the parking procedure.
Information
A component of the parking assistant is the
PDC Park Distance Control.
When parking, also take note of the visual and
acoustic information and instructions issued
by the PDC, the parking assistant and the rear‐
view camera and react accordingly.
Loud noises from outside and inside the vehi‐
cle may prevent you from hearing the PDC's
signal tone.
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐
spective situations.◀
ATTENTION
The parking assistant can steer the vehi‐
cle over or onto curbs. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene in the respective situations.◀
An engine that has been switched off by the
Auto Start Stop function is restarted automati‐
cally when the parking assistant is activated.
Seite 154
Controls Driving comfort
154
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Ultrasound sensors
The ultrasound sensors for measuring parking
spaces are located on the side of the vehicle.
To ensure full functionality:
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the sensors for long periods and
maintain a distance of at least 12 in‐
ches/30 cm.
▷ Do not put stickers over sensors.
Requirements
For measuring parking spaces
▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.
▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐
cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.
Suitable parking space
▷ Gaps behind an object that has a min.
length of 5 ft/1.5 m.
▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum
length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
▷ Min. length of gap between two objects:
your vehicle's length plus approx.
3.3 ft/1.0 m.
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
Regarding the parking procedure
▷ Doors and tailgate closed.
▷ Parking brake released.
▷ When parking in parking spaces on the
driver's side, the corresponding turn signal
must be set where applicable.
Switching on and activating
Switching on with the button
Press park assistance button.
The LED lights up.
The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
Parking assistant is activated automatically.
Switching on with reverse gear
Shift into reverse.
The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
To activate: "Parking Assistant"
Seite 155
Driving comfort Controls
155
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Display on the Control Display
System activated/deactivated
Symbol Meaning
Gray: the system is not available.
White: the system is available but
not activated.
The system is activated.
Parking space search and system
status
▷ Colored symbols, see arrows, on the side
of the vehicle illustrated. Parking assistant
is activated and search for parking space
active.
▷ Control Display shows suitable parking
spaces at the edge of the road next to the
vehicle symbol. When the parking assistant
is active, suitable parking spaces are high‐
lighted.
▷ The parking procedure is ac‐
tive. Steering control has
been taken over by system.
▷ Parking space search is always active
whenever the vehicle is moving forward
slow and straight, even if the system is de‐
activated. When the system is deactivated,
the displays on the Control Display are
shown in gray.
Parking using the parking assistant
1.
Press park assistance button or shift
into reverse gear to switch the parking as‐
sistant on, refer to page 155. Activate the
parking assistant if needed.
Parking assistant is activated.
2. Pass the row of parked vehicles at a speed
of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and at a
distance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m.
The status of the parking space search and
possible parking spaces are displayed on
the Control Display, refer to page 156.
3. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
The best possible parking position will
come after gear change on the stationary
vehicle - wait for the automatic steering
wheel move.
The end of the parking procedure is indi‐
cated on the Control Display.
4. Adjust the parking position yourself if
needed.
Interrupting manually
The parking assistant can be interrupted at any
time:
▷ "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol
on the Control Display.
▷ Press park assistance button.
Interrupting automatically
The system is interrupted automatically in the
following situations:
▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or if
he takes over steering.
▷ If a gear is selected that does not match
the instruction on the Control Display.
▷ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
6 mph/10 km/h.
Seite 156
Controls Driving comfort
156
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
▷ Possible on snow-covered or slippery road
surfaces.
▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to
overcome, such as curbs.
▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly
arise.
▷ If the Park Distance Control PDC displays
clearances that are too small.
▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts
or the time taken for parking is exceeded.
▷ When switching to another function on the
Control Display.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Resume
An interrupted parking procedure can be con‐
tinued if needed.
Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to
page 155, and follow the instructions on the
Control Display.
Switching off
The system can be deactivated as follows:
▷ Press park assistance button.
▷ Switching off the ignition.
System limits
Information
WARNING
The system can react incorrectly or not
at all due to the system limits. There is risk of
accidents or risk of property damage. Observe
the information regarding the system limits
and actively intervene, if needed.◀
No parking assistance
The parking assistant does not offer assis‐
tance in the following situations:
▷ In tight curves.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
roads.
▷ On slippery ground.
▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the
parking space.
▷ With ditches or edges, for example an edge
of a port.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measuring might not function under
the following circumstances:
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for ex‐
ample coats.
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐
sound, for example from passing vehicles
or loud machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐
aged or out of position.
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐
treme heat or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges or cargo.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
Low objects already displayed, for example,
curbs, can move into the blind area of the sen‐
sors before or after a continuous tone sounds.
Seite 157
Driving comfort Controls
157
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
It can happen that parking spaces are detected
that are not suitable or suitable parking spaces
are not detected.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The parking assistant failed. Have the system
checked.
Seite 158
Controls Driving comfort
158
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Climate control
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Automatic climate control
1 Vent settings
2 Air flow
3 AUTO program
4 Interior temperature sensor — always keep
clear
5 Recirculated-air mode
6 Temperature
7 Defrosts windows and removes condensa‐
tion
8 Cooling function
9 Rear window defroster
10 Seat heating 56
Seite 159
Climate control Controls
159
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Climate control functions in detail
Switching the system on/off
Switching on
Set any air volume.
The AUTO program can also be switched on
directly via the AUTO button.
Switching off
Turn the rotary switch for the air volume, refer
to page 161, to 0. The blower and automatic
climate control are turned off entirely.
Temperature
Turn the ring to set the desired
temperature.
The automatic climate control reaches this
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed
by increasing the cooling or heating output,
and then keeps it constant.
Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐
just the set temperature.
Cooling function
The air in the car's interior will be cooled and
dehumidified and, depending on the tempera‐
ture setting, warmed again.
The car's interior can only be cooled with the
engine running.
Press button.
Air conditioning is switched on or off.
Depending on the weather, the windshield and
side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐
gine is started.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water, refer to page 185, devel‐
ops that exits underneath the vehicle.
AUTO program
Press button.
Air flow, air distribution and tempera‐
ture are controlled automatically.
Depending on the selected temperature and
outside influences, the air is directed to the
windshield, side windows, upper body, and
into the floor area.
The cooling function, refer to page 160, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
gram.
Recirculated-air mode
You may respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air currently
within the vehicle.
Press button repeatedly to select an
operating mode:
▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply
of outside air into the vehicle is perma‐
nently blocked.
To prevent window fogging, recirculated-air
mode switches off automatically after a certain
amount of time, depending on the environ‐
mental conditions.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the
fogging of the windows increases.
If the windows fog over, switch off recircu‐
lated-air mode and increase the air flow, if
needed.
Seite 160
Controls Climate control
160
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Air flow, manual
Turn the ring to set the desired
air flow.
The higher the rate, the more ef‐
fective the heating or cooling
will be.
The air flow of the automatic climate control
may be reduced automatically to save battery
power.
Manual air distribution
Press buttons repeatedly to select a program:
▷ Windows.
▷ Upper body region.
▷ Floor area.
You may combine these programs as needed.
Defrosts windows and removes
condensation
Press button.
Ice and condensation are quickly re‐
moved from the windshield and the front side
windows.
Adjust air flow with the program active.
If the windows are fogged over, you can also
switch on the cooling function to dehumidify
the air.
Rear window defroster
Press button.
The rear window defroster switches
off automatically after a certain period of time.
Microfilter
In external and recirculated air mode the mi‐
crofilter filters dust and pollen from the air.
This filter should be replaced during scheduled
maintenance, refer to page 226, of your vehi‐
cle.
Seite 161
Climate control Controls
161
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Automatic climate control with enhanced features
1 Temperature, left
2 AUTO program
3 Display
4 Remove ice and condensation
5 Air flow
6 Display
7 Vent settings
8 Maximum cooling
9 Temperature, right
10 Seat heating, right 56
11 Recirculated-air mode
12 SYNC program
13 Cooling function
14 Rear window defroster
15 Seat heating, left 56
Climate control functions in detail
Switching the system on/off
Switching on
Press any button except:
▷ SYNC program.
▷ Rear window defroster.
▷ Left side of Air volume button.
▷ Seat heating.
Switching off
Press and hold the left button until the
control switches off.
Temperature
Turn the ring to set the desired
temperature.
The automatic climate control reaches this
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed
Seite 162
Controls Climate control
162
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
by increasing the cooling or heating output,
and then keeps it constant.
Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐
just the set temperature.
Cooling function
The air in the car's interior will be cooled and
dehumidified and, depending on the tempera‐
ture setting, warmed again.
The car's interior can only be cooled with the
engine running.
Press button.
Air conditioning is switched on or off.
Depending on the weather, the windshield and
side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐
gine is started.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water, refer to page 185, devel‐
ops that exits underneath the vehicle.
Maximum cooling
Press button.
The system is set to the lowest tem‐
perature, optimum air flow and recirculated-air
mode.
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
gion. The vents need to be open for this.
The function is available above an external
temperature of approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ And with the
engine running.
Adjust air flow with the program active.
AUTO program
Press button.
Air flow, air distribution and tempera‐
ture are controlled automatically.
Depending on the selected temperature,
AUTO intensity program and outside influen‐
ces, the air is directed to the windshield, side
windows, upper body, and into the floor area.
The cooling function, refer to page 163, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
gram.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
trols the program so as to prevent window
condensation as much as possible.
To switch off the program: press the button
again or manually adjust the air distribution.
Intensity of the AUTO program
With the AUTO program activated, the auto‐
matic intensity control can be changed.
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase intensity.
The selected intensity is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control.
Automatic recirculated-air control/
recirculated-air mode
You may respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air currently
within the vehicle.
Press button repeatedly to select an
operating mode:
▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air
control: a sensor detects pollutants in the
outside air and shuts off automatically.
▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the
supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐
manently blocked.
Recirculated-air mode switches off automati‐
cally at low external temperatures after a cer‐
tain amount of time in order to avoid window
fogging.
Seite 163
Climate control Controls
163
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the
fogging of the windows increases.
If the windows are fogged over, switch off the
recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO
button to utilize the condensation sensor.
Make sure that air can flow to the windshield.
Air flow, manual
To manually adjust air flow turn off AUTO pro‐
gram first.
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase air flow.
The selected air flow is shown on the display of
the automatic climate control.
The air flow of the automatic climate control
may be reduced automatically to save battery
power.
Manual air distribution
Press button repeatedly to select a
program:
▷ Upper body region.
▷ Upper body region and floor area.
▷ Floor area.
▷ Windows and floor area.
▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor
area.
▷ Windows: driver's side only.
▷ Windows and upper body region.
If the windows are fogged over, press the
AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐
sor.
SYNC program
Press button.
The current setting of the temperature
on the driver's side is transferred to the front
passenger side.
The program is switched off if the setting on
the front passenger side is changed.
Defrosts windows and removes
condensation
Press button.
Ice and condensation are quickly re‐
moved from the windshield and the front side
windows.
For this purpose, point the side vents onto the
side windows as needed.
Adjust air flow with the program active.
If the windows are fogged over, you can also
switch on the cooling function or press the
AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐
sor.
Rear window defroster
Press button.
The rear window defroster switches
off automatically after a certain period of time.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
In external and recirculated air mode the mi‐
crofilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust,
pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air.
This filter should be replaced during vehicle
maintenance, refer to page 226.
Seite 164
Controls Climate control
164
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Ventilation
Front ventilation
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 1.
▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing the
vents continuously, arrows 2.
▷ Thumbwheel to vary the ventilation tem‐
perature in the upper body region, arrow 3.
Toward blue: colder.
Toward red: warmer.
This does not change the set interior tem‐
perature for the driver and front passenger.
Adjusting the ventilation
▷ Ventilation for cooling:
Direct vent in your direction when vehicle's
interior is too hot.
▷ Draft-free ventilation:
Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.
Ventilation in the rear
▷ Thumbwheel for continuous opening and
closing of the vents, arrow 1.
▷ Thumbwheel to vary the ventilation tem‐
perature, arrow 2.
Toward blue: colder.
Toward red: warmer.
This does not change the adjusted interior
temperature.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 3.
Parked-car ventilation
The concept
The parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehi‐
cle interior and lowers its temperature, if
needed.
Operation can be performed via iDrive.
Functional requirements
Parked-car ventilation
▷ Using the preset activation time or when
operated directly: any external tempera‐
ture.
▷ Battery is sufficiently charged.
If parked-car ventilation is switched on, the
vehicle battery will be discharged. Thus,
limit the maximum activation time to save
the vehicle battery. The system will be
Seite 165
Climate control Controls
165
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
available again after engine starting and/or
a short trip.
▷ Make sure that the vehicle's date and time
are set correctly.
Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Switching on/off directly
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate comf. ventilation"
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol flashes if the system is switched on.
The system continues to run for some time af‐
ter being switched off.
Preselecting the switch-on time
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"
4. Set the desired time.
Activating the activation time
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate timer 1" or "Activate timer 2"
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol lights up when the switch-on time is acti‐
vated.
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol flashes when the system has been
switched on.
The system will only be switched on within the
next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be reacti‐
vated.
Seite 166
Controls Climate control
166
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Universal Integrated Remote
Control
The concept
The Universal Integrated Remote Control can
operate up to 3 functions of remote-controlled
systems such as garage door drives or lighting
systems. The Universal Integrated Remote
Control replaces up to 3 different hand-held
transmitters. To operate the remote control,
the buttons on the interior mirror must be pro‐
grammed with the desired functions. The
hand-held transmitter for the particular system
is required in order to program the remote con‐
trol.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
functions for the sake of security.
Information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing remote-controlled systems, e.g., the ga‐
rage door, using the integrated universal re‐
mote control. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also follow
the safety instructions of the hand-held trans‐
mitter.◀
Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the packag‐
ing or in the owner's manual of the sys‐
tem to be controlled, the system is
generally compatible with the Universal Inte‐
grated Remote Control.
If you have any questions, please contact:
▷ A dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
Corporation.
Control elements on the interior mirror
▷ LED, arrow 1.
▷ Buttons, arrow 2.
▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐
quired for programming.
Programming
General information
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Initial setup:
Press and hold the left and right button on
the interior mirror simultaneously for ap‐
Seite 167
Interior equipment Controls
167
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
proximately 20 seconds until the LED on
the interior mirror flashes. This erases all
programming of the buttons on the interior
mirror.
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐
tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in‐
ches/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons of
the interior mirror. The required distance
depends on the manual transmitter.
4. Simultaneously press and hold the button
of the desired function on the hand-held
transmitter and the button to be program‐
med on the interior mirror. The LED on the
interior mirror will begin flashing slowly.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED
flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing
faster indicates that the button on the inte‐
rior mirror has been programmed.
If the LED does not flash faster after at
least 60 seconds, change the distance be‐
tween the interior mirror and the hand-held
transmitter and repeat the step. Several
more attempts at different distances may
be necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds be‐
tween attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior mirror button and repeat‐
edly press and release the hand-held
transmitter button for 2 seconds.
6.
To program other functions on other but‐
tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.
The systems can be controlled using the inte‐
rior mirror buttons.
Special feature of the alternating-
code wireless system
If you are unable to operate the system after
repeated programming, please check if the
system to be controlled features an alternat‐
ing-code radio system.
Read the system's owner's manual, or press
the programmed button on the interior mirror
longer. If the LED on the interior mirror starts
flashing rapidly and then stays lit constantly for
2 seconds, the system features an alternating-
code radio system. Flashing and continuous il‐
lumination of the LED will repeat for approxi‐
mately 20 seconds.
For systems with an alternating-code radio
system, the universal remote control and the
system also have to be synchronized.
Please read the owner's manual to find out
how to synchronize the system.
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec‐
ond person.
Synchronizing the universal remote control
with the system:
1.
Park the vehicle within range of the re‐
mote-controlled system.
2. Program the relevant button on the interior
mirror as described.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
on the system being programmed. You
have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the
interior mirror for approximately 3 seconds
and then release it. If necessary, repeat this
step up to three times in order to finish
synchronization. Once synchronization is
complete, the programmed function will be
carried out.
Reprogramming individual buttons
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to
be programmed.
3. As soon as the interior mirror LED starts
flashing slowly, hold the hand-held trans‐
mitter for the system to be controlled ap‐
prox. 1 to 3 inches/2.5 to 8 cm away from
the buttons of the interior mirror. The re‐
quired distance depends on the manual
transmitter.
Seite 168
Controls Interior equipment
168
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the
desired function on the hand-held trans‐
mitter.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the inte‐
rior mirror LED flashes more rapidly. The
LED flashing faster indicates that the but‐
ton on the interior mirror has been pro‐
grammed. The system can then be con‐
trolled by the button on the interior mirror.
If the LED does not flash faster after at
least 60 seconds, change the distance and
repeat the step. Several more attempts at
different distances may be necessary. Wait
at least 15 seconds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior mirror button and repeat‐
edly press and release the hand-held
transmitter button for 2 seconds.
Controls
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing remote-controlled systems, e.g., the ga‐
rage door, using the integrated universal re‐
mote control. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also follow
the safety instructions of the hand-held trans‐
mitter.◀
The system, such as the garage door, can be
operated using the button on the interior mirror
while the engine is running or when the ignition
is started. To do this, hold down the button
within receiving range of the system until the
function is activated. The interior mirror LED
stays lit while the wireless signal is being
transmitted.
Deleting stored functions
Press and hold the left and right button on the
interior mirror simultaneously for approxi‐
mately 20 seconds until the LED flashes rap‐
idly. All stored functions will be deleted. The
functions cannot be deleted individually.
Sun visor
Glare shield
Fold the sun visor down or up.
Glare shield from the side
Folding out
1. Fold the sun visor down.
2. Unhook it from the holder and swing it to
the side.
3. Move it back to the desired position.
Folding up
Proceed in the reverse order to close the sun
visor.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be‐
hind a cover. When the cover is opened, the
mirror lighting switches on.
Ashtray/cigarette lighter
Ashtray
Opening
Slide the cover forward.
The ashtray can be inserted in the cup holder.
Seite 169
Interior equipment Controls
169
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Emptying
Take out the insert.
Lighter
WARNING
Contact with hot heating elements or the
hot socket of the cigarette lighter can cause
burns. Flammable materials can ignite if the
cigarette lighter falls down or is held against
the respective objects. There is risk of fire and
injuries. Hold the cigarette lighter on its handle.
Make sure that children do not use the ciga‐
rette lighter and do not burn themselves, e.g.,
by carrying the remote control along when ex‐
iting the vehicle.◀
ATTENTION
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of
damage to property. Replace the cigarette
lighter or socket cover again after using the
socket.◀
The cigarette lighter is located in the center
console.
Push in the lighter.
The lighter can be removed as
soon as it pops back out.
Connecting electrical
devices
Information
ATTENTION
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12 volt on-board net‐
work can be overloaded or damaged. There is
a risk of damage to property. Only connect
battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the
starting aid terminals in the engine compart‐
ment.◀
ATTENTION
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of
damage to property. Replace the cigarette
lighter or socket cover again after using the
socket.◀
Sockets
General information
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment while the engine is run‐
ning or when the ignition is switched on.
Information
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐
patible connectors.
Seite 170
Controls Interior equipment
170
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Front center console
Slide the cover forward.
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.
Center armrest
Remove the cover.
Rear center console
Remove the cover.
In the cargo area
The socket is located on the right side in the
cargo area.
USB interface/AUX-IN port
The concept
Mobile devices with USB port can be con‐
nected to the USB interface.
A mobile audio device, e.g. a MP3 player, can
be connected using the AUX-IN port.
General information
Depending on the equipment, the USB inter‐
face is located in the center console or in the
glove compartment.
USB interface in the glove
compartment
Mobile storage devices with USB port can be
connected to the USB interface in the glove
compartment.
Common file systems are supported. FAT32
and exFAT are the recommended formats.
The following applications are possible:
▷ Exporting and importing profiles, refer to
page 36.
▷ Loading of software updates.
▷ Adding music files to the music collection
and saving the music collection.
Seite 171
Interior equipment Controls
171
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
USB interface in the center console
In addition to the USB storage devices descri‐
bed above, additional mobile devices with USB
port can be connected to the USB interface in
the center console.
▷ Mobile phones supported by the USB in‐
terface.
The snap-in adapter features a separate
USB port that is automatically connected
when a compatible mobile phone is in‐
serted.
▷ Audio devices with USB port, for example
MP3 player.
This allows further uses:
▷ Playing music files via USB audio.
▷ Playing video films via USB video.
Information about compatible USB devices can
be found at www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.
Information
Observe the following when connecting:
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
▷ Use a flexible adapter cable.
▷ Protect the USB device against mechanical
damage.
▷ Due to the large number of USB devices
available on the market, it cannot be guar‐
anteed that every device is operable on the
vehicle.
▷ Do not expose USB devices to extreme en‐
vironmental conditions, such as very high
temperatures; refer to the owner's manual
of the device.
▷ Due to the many different compression
techniques, proper playback of the media
stored on the USB device cannot be guar‐
anteed in all cases.
▷ A connected USB device is supplied with
charging current via the USB interface, as‐
suming this is supported by the device.
▷ To ensure proper transmission of the
stored data, do not charge an USB device
via the onboard socket, when it is con‐
nected to the USB interface.
▷ Depending on how the USB device should
be used, settings may be required on the
USB device, refer to the owner's manual of
the device.
Not suitable USB devices:
▷ USB hard drives.
▷ USB hubs.
▷ USB memory card readers with multiple in‐
serts.
▷ HFS-formatted USB devices.
▷ MTP devices.
▷ Devices such as fans or lights.
Overview
The USB interface and the AUX-IN port are lo‐
cated in the center armrest.
The USB interface is located in the glove com‐
partment.
Seite 172
Controls Interior equipment
172
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Cargo area
Cargo cover
Closing
Pull out the cargo cover, arrow 1, and hook
both sides into the brackets, arrow 2.
CAUTION
A cargo cover hooked in incorrectly can
cause damage. There is a risk of property dam‐
age. Hook the cargo cover on both sides.◀
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a cable
connection to the vehicle, e.g., mobile phones,
can be thrown into the vehicle's interior while
driving, e.g.,in the event of an accident or dur‐
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a
a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the
vehicle's interior.◀
WARNING
A cargo cover that snaps back quickly
can jam body parts or cause damage. There is
a risk of injuries or a risk of property damage.
Do not let the cargo cover snap back into
place.◀
Removing: cargo cover without cargo
area partition net
The cover can be removed to load bulky lug‐
gage.
Reach under the cover and turn it upward, ar‐
rows. Pull the cover back horizontally.
Removing: cargo cover with cargo
area partition net
The cover can be removed to load bulky lug‐
gage.
1.
Press button, arrow 1, to unlock the cover.
2. Pull the cover back, arrow 2.
Installing
Slide the cover forward horizontally into the
two side brackets until it audibly latches.
The red warning fields disappear in the case of
a cover with cargo area partition net.
Tug on the cover to check if it is properly
locked in place.
Enlarging the cargo area
General information
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding
down the rear seat backrest.
The rear seat backrest is divided into two parts
at a ratio of 60 to 40.
Seite 173
Interior equipment Controls
173
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
If equipped with through-loading system: the
rear seat backrest is divided in the ratio 40–20–
40. The sides and the middle section can be
folded down separately.
Information
WARNING
Danger of jamming with folding down the
backrests. There is a risk of injuries or a risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the rear backrest and the of the
head restraint is clear prior to folding down.◀
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
seats and backrests are securely engaged. If
possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.◀
WARNING
With an unlocked backrest, an unsecured
load can be thrown into the vehicle's interior,
e.g., in case of an accident, braking or evasive
maneuver. There is a a risk of injury. Make sure
that the backrest engages into the locking af‐
ter folding it back.◀
WARNING
With a rear backrest that is not locked,
the protective function of the middle safety
belt is not guaranteed. There is a risk of inju‐
ries or danger to life. If you are using the mid‐
dle safety belt, lock the wider rear backrest.◀
Folding down the sides
The right side can be folded down separately.
The left side can be folded down in combina‐
tion with the middle section.
Reach into the recess and pull forward.
Folding down the middle section
Reach into the recess and pull forward.
Cargo area partition net
Information
WARNING
If the cargo net snaps back, it can cause
injuries or damage. There is a risk of injuries or
a risk of property damage. Do not let the cargo
area partition net snap back into place.◀
With a normal cargo area
1.
Fold open the rear covers on the roofliner.
2. Pull the cargo area partition net out of the
case by the strap.
3. Insert the bars into the brackets on both
sides in the roofliner toward the front, ar‐
Seite 174
Controls Interior equipment
174
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
row. This is best performed from the rear
seat.
If the cargo area partition net is no longer
needed: proceed in reverse order.
With an enlarged cargo area
1.
Fold down the entire rear seat backrest.
2. Press button, arrow 1, to unlock the case
on both sides.
3. Pull the case rearward out of the two side
brackets, arrow 2. Make sure not to tilt it in
the process.
4. Slide the case all the way into the guides,
arrows 1, on the backs of the backrests.
5. Fold open the front covers on the roofliner.
6. Carefully pull out the cargo area partition
net and insert it into the brackets as in the
normal cargo area, refer to page 174.
If the cargo area partition net is no longer
needed: proceed in reverse order.
Finally, slide the case forward into the two
brackets on the sides, until it engages. The red
warning fields disappear.
Ski and snowboard bag
The ski and snowboard bag is contained in a
protective jacket in the cargo area.
Follow the installation and owner's manual in‐
cluded in the protective jacket.
Seite 175
Interior equipment Controls
175
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Information
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a cable
connection to the vehicle, e.g., mobile phones,
can be thrown into the vehicle's interior while
driving, e.g.,in the event of an accident or dur‐
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a
a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the
vehicle's interior.◀
ATTENTION
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can
damage the dashboard. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Do not use anti-slip pads.◀
Storage compartments
The following storage compartments are avail‐
able in the vehicle interior:
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
side, refer to page 176.
▷ Storage compartment in the front center
armrest, refer to page 177.
▷ Compartments in the doors, refer to
page 177.
▷ Pockets on the backrests of the front
seats.
▷ Net in the front passenger floor area.
Glove compartment
Front passenger side
Information
WARNING
Folded open, the glove compartment
protrudes in the vehicle's interior. Objects in
the glove compartment can be thrown into the
vehicle's interior while driving, e.g., in the event
of an accident or during braking and evasive
maneuvers. There is a a risk of injury. Always
close the glove compartment immediately after
using it.◀
Opening
Pull the handle.
The light in the glove compartment switches
on.
Closing
Fold cover closed.
Seite 176
Controls Storage compartments
176
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Locking
The glove compartment can be locked with an
integrated key. This prevents access to the
glove compartment.
After the glove compartment is locked, the re‐
mote control can be handed over, such as at a
hotel, without the integrated key.
Compartments in the doors
WARNING
Breakable objects, e.g., glass bottles, can
break in the event of an accident. Broken glass
can be scattered in the vehicle's interior. There
is a a risk of injury. Do not stow any breakable
objects in the vehicle's interior.◀
Center armrest
Opening
Press button, arrow 1, and fold the center arm
rest up, arrow 2.
Connection for an external audio
device
An external audio device, for example, an MP3
player, can be connected via the AUX-IN port
in the center armrest.
Cup holders
Information
WARNING
Unsuitable containers in the cup holder
and hot beverages can damage the cup holder
and increase the a risk of injury in the event of
an accident. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Use light-weight, unbreaka‐
ble, and sealable containers. Do not transport
hot beverages. Do not force objects into the
cup holder.◀
Front
In the center console.
Slide the cover forward.
Seite 177
Storage compartments Controls
177
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Rear
In the center armrest.
Pull the center armrest forward at the strap.
To open: press the button.
To close: push both covers back in, one after
the other.
ATTENTION
With an open cup holder, the center arm‐
rest cannot be folded back up. There is a risk
of damage to property. Press back the covers
before the center armrest is folded up.◀
Clothes hooks
Information
WARNING
Clothing articles on the clothes hooks
can obstruct the view while driving. There is
risk of an accident. When suspending clothing
articles from the hooks, ensure that they will
not obstruct the driver's view.◀
WARNING
Improper use of the clothes hooks can
lead to a danger of objects flying about during
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injury and risk of property damage. Only
hang lightweight objects, e.g., clothing articles,
from the clothes hooks.◀
General information
The clothes hooks are located in the grab han‐
dles in the rear.
Storage compartments in the
cargo area
Storage space under cargo floor panel
Fold up the cargo floor panel. The storage
space under the cargo floor panel is subdi‐
vided.
Storage compartment on the right
side
A waterproof storage compartment is available
on the right side of the cargo area.
Multi-function hook
WARNING
Improper use of the multi-function hooks
can lead to a danger of objects flying about
during braking and evasive maneuvers. There
is a risk of injury and risk of property damage.
Only hang lightweight objects, e.g., shopping
bags, from the multi-function hooks. Only
transport heavy luggage in the cargo area if it
has been appropriately secured.◀
Seite 178
Controls Storage compartments
178
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
A multi-function hook is located on the left
side trim in the cargo area.
Net
Smaller objects can be stored in the net on the
left side of the cargo area.
Left side storage compartment
Pull the handle.
Lashing eyes in the cargo area
To secure the cargo, refer to page 187, there
are lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Lashing eyes in the cargo area with
rail
To secure the cargo, refer to page 187, there
are lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Reversible floor panel
The bottom of the cargo floor panel is coated
with a water- and dirt-resistant finish.
Fold the cargo floor panel up, remove and turn
it over.
Cargo net, FlexNet
To secure the cargo, refer to page 187, the
flexible cargo net can also be used.
Seite 179
Storage compartments Controls
179
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Driving tips
This chapter provides you with information
useful in dealing with specific driving and
operating modes.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Breaking-in period
General information
Moving parts need time to adjust to one an‐
other (break-in time).
The following instructions will help accomplish
a long vehicle life and good efficiency.
During break-in, do not use the Launch Con‐
trol.
Information
WARNING
Due to new parts and components,
safety and driver assistance systems can react
with a delay. There is risk of an accident. After
installing new parts or with a new vehicle, drive
conservatively and intervene early if necessary.
Observe the break-in procedures of the re‐
spective parts and components.◀
Engine, transmission, and axle drive
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road
speed:
▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and
100 mph/160 km/h.
▷ For diesel engine 3,500 rpm and
93 mph/150 km/h.
Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐
stances.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
increased.
Tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
they achieve their full traction potential after a
break-in time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐
prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimal per‐
formance between brake discs and brake
pads. Drive moderately during this break-in pe‐
riod.
Following part replacement
The same break-in procedures should be ob‐
served if any of the components above-men‐
tioned have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
Driving on poor roads
The vehicle combines all-wheel drive with the
advantages of a normal automobile.
CAUTION
Objects in unpaved areas, for example
stones or branches, can damage the vehicle.
There is a risk of property damage. Do not
drive on unpaved terrain.◀
Seite 182
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
182
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
For your own safety, for the safety of passen‐
gers and of the vehicle, heed the following
points:
▷ Become familiar with the vehicle before
starting a trip; do not take risks in driving.
▷ Adjust the speed to the road surface con‐
ditions. The steeper and more uneven the
road surface, the slower the speed should
be.
▷ When driving on steep uphill or downhill
grades: add engine oil and coolant up to
near the MAX mark. Uphill and downhill
grades can be traveled up to no more than
50 %.
▷ On steep downhill grades, use Hill Descent
Control HDC.
Starting out is possible on uphill grades up
to 30 %. The permissible side tilt is 30 %.
▷ Avoid that the chassis bottom coming in
contact with the ground.
The ground clearance is no more than
7.8 inches/20 cm and can vary according
to the vehicle's load.
▷ When wheels continue to spin, depress the
accelerator so that driving stability control
systems can distribute the driving force to
the wheels. Activate DTC Dynamic Trac‐
tion Control if available.
After a trip on poor roads
After a trip on poor roads, check wheels and
tires for damage to maintain driving safety.
Clear heavy soiling from the body.
General driving notes
Closing the tailgate
WARNING
An open tailgate protrudes from the vehi‐
cle and can endanger occupants and other
traffic participants or damage the vehicle in the
event of an accident, braking or evasive ma‐
neuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter
the vehicle interior. There is a risk of injury or
risk of property damage. Do not drive with the
tailgate open.◀
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
avoided:
▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents.
▷ Drive moderately.
Hot exhaust system
WARNING
During driving operation, high tempera‐
tures can occur underneath the vehicle body,
e.g., caused by the exhaust gas system. If
combustible materials, such as leaves or grass,
come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust
gas system, these materials can ignite. There
is a risk of injury or risk of property damage.
Do not remove the heat shields installed and
never apply undercoating to them. Make sure
that no combustible materials can come in
contact with hot vehicle parts in driving opera‐
tion, idle or during parking. Do not touch the
hot exhaust system.◀
Diesel particulate filter
The diesel particulate filter collects soot parti‐
cles and burns them periodically at high tem‐
peratures.
During several minutes of cleaning the follow‐
ing may occur:
▷ Temporarily, the engine may run less
smoothly.
▷ Noises and a slight amount of smoke com‐
ing from the exhaust until shortly after the
engine is shut down.
▷ A somewhat higher engine speed is neces‐
sary to reach usual performance.
Seite 183
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
183
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Mobile communication devices in the
vehicle
WARNING
Vehicle electronics and mobile phones
can influence one another. There is radiation
due to the transmission operations of mobile
phones. There is a risk of injury or risk of prop‐
erty damage. If possible, in the vehicle's inte‐
rior use only mobile phones with direct con‐
nections to an exterior antenna in order to
exclude mutual disturbance and deflect the ra‐
diation from the vehicle's interior.◀
Hydroplaning
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
form between the tires and road surface.
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
loss of contact between the tires and the road
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
steer and brake the vehicle.
Driving through water
ATTENTION
When driving too quickly through too
deep water, water can enter into the engine
compartment, the electrical system or the
transmission. There is a risk of damage to
property. When driving through water, do not
exceed the maximum indicated water level and
the maximum speed for driving through wa‐
ter.◀
When driving through water, observe the fol‐
lowing:
▷ Drive through calm water only.
▷ Drive through water only if it is not deeper
than maximum 19.6 inches/50 cm.
▷ Drive through water no faster than walking
speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.
Braking safely
Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand‐
ard feature.
Perform an emergency stop in situations that
require such.
Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid
any obstacles with a minimum of steering ef‐
fort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from
the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its
active mode.
In certain braking situations, the perforated
brake discs can emit functional noises. How‐
ever, this has no effect on the performance and
operational reliability of the brake.
Objects in the movement area around
pedals and floor area
WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is risk of an accident. Stow objects in
the vehicle such that they are secured and
cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use
floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and
can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
are securely fastened again after they were re‐
moved, e.g., for cleaning.◀
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain,
press brake pedal ever so gently every few
miles.
Ensure that this action does not endanger
other traffic.
The heat generated in this process helps dry
the brake discs and pads.
In this way braking efficiency will be available
when you need it.
Seite 184
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
184
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Hills
WARNING
Light but consistent brake pressure can
lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing out
and possibly even brake failure. There is risk of
an accident. Avoid placing excessive stress on
the brake system.◀
WARNING
In idle state or with the engine switched
off, safety-relevant functions are restricted or
not available anymore, e.g., braking effect of
the engine or braking force and steering sup‐
port. There is risk of an accident. Do not drive
in idle state or with the engine switched off.◀
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear that requires least braking efforts. Other‐
wise the brakes may overheat and reduce
brake efficiency.
You can increase the engine's braking effect
by shifting down, going all the way to first gear,
if needed.
Brake disc corrosion
Corrosion on the brake discs and contamina‐
tion on the brake pads are furthered by the fol‐
lowing circumstances:
▷ Low mileage.
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
Corrosion will built up when the maximum
pressure applied to the brake pads during
braking is not reached - thus discs don't get
cleaned.
Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause
a pulsating effect on the brakes in their re‐
sponse - generally that cannot be corrected.
Condensation under the parked
vehicle
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water develops collecting under‐
neath the vehicle.
Driving on racetracks
Higher mechanical and thermal loads during
racetrack operation lead to increased wear.
This wear is not covered by the warranty. The
vehicle is not designed for motorsports com‐
petitive use.
Seite 185
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
185
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Loading
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Information
WARNING
High gross weight can overheat the tires,
damage them, and cause a sudden drop in tire
inflation pressure. There is risk of an accident.
Pay attention to the permitted load capacity of
the tires and never exceed the permitted gross
weight.◀
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a cable
connection to the vehicle, e.g., mobile phones,
can be thrown into the vehicle's interior while
driving, e.g.,in the event of an accident or dur‐
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a
a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the
vehicle's interior.◀
ATTENTION
Fluids in the cargo area can cause dam‐
age. There is a risk of damage to property.
Make sure that no fluids leak in the cargo
area.◀
Determining the load limit
1. Locate the following statement on your ve‐
hicle’s placard:
▷ The combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed XXX kg
or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the
vehicle and unstable driving situations
may result.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kilograms or
YYY pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐
pacity.
For example, if the YYY amount equals
1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs =
400 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of lug‐
gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi‐
cle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
Seite 186
Driving tips Loading
186
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Load
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of
the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing cargo
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the
cargo.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of
the rear passenger seat backrests.
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not
occupied, secure each of the outer safety
belts in the opposite buckle.
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests
to stow cargo.
▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of
the backrests.
▷ Use the cargo area partition net, refer to
page 174, to protect passengers. Make
sure that objects cannot penetrate the
cargo area partition net.
Securing cargo
Lashing eyes in the cargo area
To secure the cargo there are four lashing
eyes in the cargo area.
Lashing eyes in the cargo area with
rails
To secure the cargo there are four movable
lashing eyes in the cargo area.
To slide the lashing eyes, press the button, ar‐
row 1. Make sure that the lashing eyes latch at
the new position.
The lashing eyes at the openings in the rails
can be removed.
Seite 187
Loading Driving tips
187
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Cargo net, FlexNet
The flexible cargo net is hooked into eyes and
secures the cargo in the cargo area. The stor‐
age net can be attached to the following eyes:
▷ Lashing eyes in the rails.
▷ Eyes on the cargo area wall.
The eyes are located on both sides of the
cargo area.
Securing cargo
WARNING
Improperly stowed objects can shift and
be thrown into the vehicle's interior, e.g., in the
event of an accident or during braking and eva‐
sive maneuvers. Vehicle occupants can be hit
and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and
secure objects and cargo properly.◀
▷ Smaller and lighter cargo: secure with
ratchet straps or with a cargo net or draw
straps.
▷ Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo
straps.
Secure cargo straps, cargo netting, retain‐
ing straps or draw straps on the lashing
eyes in the cargo area.
Roof-mounted luggage rack
Information
Installation only possible with roof rack.
Roof racks are available as special accessories.
Attachment to the rack
Follow the installation instructions of the roof
rack.
Mounting
Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained
for tilting and opening the glass sunroof.
Loading
Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise the
vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they
have a major effect on vehicle handling and
steering response.
Therefore, note the following when loading
and driving:
▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle
loads and the approved gross vehicle
weight.
▷ Be sure that adequate clearance is main‐
tained for tilting and opening the glass
sunroof.
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
▷ The roof load should not extend past the
loading area.
▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the
bottom.
▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, for exam‐
ple, tie with ratchet straps.
▷ Do not let objects project into the opening
path of the tailgate.
▷ Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration
and braking maneuvers. Take corners gen‐
tly.
Seite 188
Driving tips Loading
188
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
General information
Your vehicle contains advanced technology for
the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐
sions.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐
ferent factors.
Carrying out certain measures, such as a mod‐
erate driving style and regular maintenance,
can influence fuel consumption and the envi‐
ronmental impact.
Remove unnecessary cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove attached parts
following use
Remove roof-mounted luggage racks which
are no longer required following use.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.
Close the windows and glass
sunroof
Driving with the glass sunroof and windows
open results in increased air resistance and
thereby reduces the range.
Tires
General information
Tires can affect fuel consumption in various
ways, e.g., tire size may influence fuel con‐
sumption.
Check the tire inflation pressure
regularly
Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation
pressure at least twice a month and before
starting on a long trip.
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
tire wear.
Drive away immediately
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving
right away, but at moderate engine speeds.
This is the quickest way of warming the cold
engine up to operating temperature.
Look well ahead when
driving
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐
cle driving ahead of you.
Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel
consumption.
Seite 189
Saving fuel Driving tips
189
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Avoid high engine speeds
As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers
fuel consumption and reduces wear.
Use 1st gear to get the vehicle moving. Start‐
ing with the 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly. When
accelerating, shift up before reaching high en‐
gine speeds.
When you reach the desired speed, shift into
the highest applicable gear and drive with the
engine speed as low as possible and at a con‐
stant speed.
If necessary, observe the gear shift indicator of
the vehicle, refer to page 91.
Use coasting
When approaching a red light, take your foot
off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to
a halt.
For going downhill take your foot off the accel‐
erator and let the vehicle roll.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
Switch off the engine during
longer stops
Switch off the engine during longer stops, for
example, at traffic lights, railroad crossings or
in traffic congestion.
Auto Start/Stop function
The Auto Start/Stop function of the vehicle au‐
tomatically switches off the engine during a
stop.
If the engine is switched off and then restarted
rather than leaving the engine running con‐
stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are
reduced. Savings can begin within a few sec‐
onds of switching off the engine.
In addition, fuel consumption is also deter‐
mined by other factors, such as driving style,
road conditions, maintenance or environmental
factors.
Switch off any functions that
are not currently needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear
window defroster require a lot of energy and
reduce the range, especially in city and stop-
and-go traffic.
Switch off these functions if they are not
needed.
The ECO PRO driving program supports the
energy conserving use of comfort features.
These functions are automatically deactivated
partially or completely.
Have maintenance carried
out
Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve
optimal vehicle efficiency and service life.
BMW recommends that maintenance work be
performed by a BMW dealer’s service center.
For information on the BMW Maintenance
System, refer to page 226.
ECO PRO
The concept
ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves
on fuel consumption. For this purpose, the en‐
gine control and comfort features, e.g. the cli‐
mate control output, are adjusted.
Under certain conditions the engine is auto‐
matically decoupled from the transmission in
the D selector lever position. The vehicle con‐
tinues traveling with the engine idling to re‐
duce fuel consumption. Selector lever position
D remains engaged.
Seite 190
Driving tips Saving fuel
190
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
In addition, context-sensitive instructions are
displayed to assist with an optimized fuel con‐
sumption driving style.
The achieved extended range is displayed in
the instrument cluster as bonus range.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
The system includes the following EfficientDy‐
namics functions and displays:
▷ ECO PRO bonus range, refer to page 191.
▷ ECO PRO tips driving instruction, refer to
page 192.
▷ ECO PRO climate control, refer to
page 191.
▷ ECO PRO coasting driving status, refer to
page 193.
Activate ECO PRO
Press button repeatedly until ECO
PRO is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Configuring ECO PRO
Via the Driving Dynamics Control
1.
Activate ECO PRO.
2. "Configure ECO PRO"
Via the iDrive
1.
"Settings"
2. "ECO PRO mode"
With respective equipment:
1. "Settings"
2. "Driving mode"
3. "Configure ECO PRO"
ECO PRO Tip
▷ "Tip at:":
Adjust the ECO PRO speed.
▷ "ECO PRO speed warning":
An ECO PRO tip is displayed if the speed
of the set ECO PRO limit is exceeded.
Coasting
Fuel-efficiency can be optimized by disengag‐
ing the engine and Coasting with the engine
idling.
This function is only available in ECO PRO
mode.
ECO PRO climate control
"ECO PRO climate control"
Climate control is set to be fuel-efficient.
By making a slight change to the set tempera‐
ture, or slowly adjusting the rate of heating or
cooling of the car's interior, fuel consumption
can be economized.
The mirror heating is made available when out‐
side temperatures are very cold.
ECO PRO Efficiency
Shows potential savings with the current set‐
tings in percentages.
Display in the instrument cluster
ECO PRO bonus range
An adjusted driving style helps
you extend your driving range.
This may be displayed as the
bonus range in the instrument
cluster.
Seite 191
Saving fuel Driving tips
191
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
The bonus range is shown in the range display.
The bonus range is automatically reset every
time the vehicle is refueled.
Efficiency display
Display in the instrument cluster
Display in the instrument cluster with extended
range
A mark in the efficiency display informs about
the current driving style.
Mark in the area of arrow 1: display of the en‐
ergy recovered by coasting or when braking.
Mark in the area of arrow 2: display when ac‐
celerating.
Your driving style's efficiency is shown by the
bar's color:
▷ Blue display: efficient driving style as long
as the mark moves within the blue range.
▷ Gray display: adjust driving style, e. g. by
backing off the accelerator pedal.
The display switches to blue as soon as all
conditions for fuel-efficiency-optimized driving
are met.
ECO PRO tip, driving tip
The arrow indicates that the driving
style can be adjusted to be more fuel
efficient by backing off the accelerator
for instance.
Information
The efficiency display and ECO PRO tips in the
instrument cluster appear when the ECO PRO
display is activated.
Activating driving style and ECO PRO tips:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Instrument cluster"
3. "ECO PRO Info"
ECO PRO tip, symbols
An additional symbol and text instructions are
displayed.
Symbol Measure
For efficient driving back off the ac‐
celerator or delay accelerating to al‐
low time to assess road conditions.
Reduce speed to the selected ECO
PRO speed.
Steptronic transmission: shift from
M/S to D.
Indications on the Control Display
Displaying EfficientDynamics info
Information on fuel consumption and technol‐
ogy can be displayed while driving.
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "EfficientDynamics"
Seite 192
Driving tips Saving fuel
192
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Displaying fuel consumption history
The average fuel consumption can be dis‐
played within an adjustable time frame.
Vertical bars show consumption for the se‐
lected time frame.
Trip interruptions are represented below the
bar on the time axis.
"Consumption history"
Adjusting fuel consumption history
time frame
Select the symbol.
Resetting fuel consumption history
1.
Open "Options".
2. "Reset consumption history"
Displaying EfficientDynamics info
The current efficiency can be displayed.
"EfficientDynamics info"
The following systems are displayed:
▷ Auto Start/Stop function.
▷ Energy recovery.
▷ Climate control output.
▷ Coasting.
Display ECO PRO tips
"ECO PRO tips"
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Coasting
The concept
The system helps to conserve fuel.
To do this, under certain conditions the engine
is automatically decoupled from the transmis‐
sion when selector lever position D is set. The
vehicle continues traveling with the engine
idling to reduce fuel consumption. Selector
lever position D remains engaged.
This driving condition is referred to as coast‐
ing.
As soon as you step on the brake or accelera‐
tor pedal, the engine is automatically coupled
again.
Information
Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO driv‐
ing mode.
Coasting is automatically activated when ECO
PRO mode is called via the Driving Dynamics
Control.
The function is available in a certain speed
range.
A proactive driving style helps the driver to use
the function as often as possible and supports
the fuel-conserving effect of coasting.
Safety mode
The function is not available under one of the
following conditions.
▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated.
▷ Driving in the dynamic limit range and on
steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ Battery charge status temporarily too low
or vehicle electrical system drawing exces‐
sive current.
▷ Cruise control activated.
Functional requirements
In ECO PRO mode, this function is available in
a speed range from approximately 30 mph, ap‐
prox. 50 km/h to 100 mph, approx. 160 km/h, if
the following conditions are met:
▷ Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not
operated.
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐
tion D.
▷ Engine and transmission are at operating
temperature.
The driving status Coast can be influenced
with the shift paddles.
Seite 193
Saving fuel Driving tips
193
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Display
Display in the instrument cluster
The mark in the efficiency display is backlit in
blue and is located at the zero point. The tach‐
ometer approximately indicates idle speed.
The coasting point indicator is illuminated at
the zero point during coasting.
Display in the instrument cluster with
extended range
The mark in the efficiency dis‐
play below the tachometer is
backlit in blue and is located at
the zero point. The tachometer
approximately indicates idle
speed.
The coasting point indicator is illuminated at
the zero point during coasting.
Indications on the Control Display
The Coasting driving condition is displayed in
EfficientDynamics Info while this driving mode
is active.
Color code blue, arrow 1, and symbol, arrow 2:
driving condition Coasting.
Displaying EfficientDynamics info
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "EfficientDynamics"
3. "EfficientDynamics info"
Deactivating the system manually
The function can be deactivated in the Config‐
ure ECO PRO menu, for example, to use the
braking effect of the engine when traveling
downhill.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Seite 194
Driving tips Saving fuel
194
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Seite 195
Saving fuel Driving tips
195
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Mobility
In order to always ensure your mobility, you will
find important information on operating fluids,
wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside
Assistance in the following.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Refueling
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Information
Observe the fuel recommendation, refer to
page 200, prior to refueling.
ATTENTION
With a range of less than 30 miles/50 km
it is possible that the engine will no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐
sured anymore. There is a risk of damage to
property. Refuel promptly.◀
Diesel engines
The filler neck is designed for refueling at die‐
sel fuel pumps.
Fuel cap
Opening
1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
flap.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached
to the fuel filler flap.
Closing
1.
Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you
clearly hear a click.
Seite 198
Mobility Refueling
198
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
WARNING
The retaining strap of the fuel cap may
be jammed and crushed during closing. In this
case, the lid cannot be correctly closed and
fuel vapors or fuel can escape. There is a risk
of injury or a risk of property damage. Pay at‐
tention that the retaining strap is not jammed
or crushed when closing the lid.◀
Observe the following when
refueling
ATTENTION
Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfill‐
ing of the fuel tank can damage the fuel sys‐
tem. On contact with Painted surfaces may be
damaged by contact with fuel. Escaping fuel
can harm the environment. There is a risk of
damage to property. Avoid overfilling.◀
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Observe safety regulations posted at the gas
station.
Seite 199
Refueling Mobility
199
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Fuel
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Fuel recommendation
General information
Depending on the region, many gas stations
sell fuel that has been customized to winter or
summer conditions. Fuel that is available in
winter helps make a cold start easier, for exam‐
ple.
Information
ATTENTION
Even fuels that conform to the specifica‐
tions can be of low quality. This may cause en‐
gine problems, e.g., poor engine start-up be‐
havior, poor handling and/or poor performance.
There is a risk of damage to property. In case
of engine problems, switch gas stations or use
a brand name fuel with a higher octane rat‐
ing.◀
Gasoline
General information
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline
should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur con‐
tent.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐
taining metal must not be used.
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of
10 %, i. e., E10, may be used for refueling.
Ethanol should meet the following quality
standards:
US: ASTM 4806–xx
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
xx: comply with the current standard in each
case.
Information
ATTENTION
Do not press the Start/Stop button after
refueling with the wrong fuel. Furthermore, the
catalytic converter is permanently damaged.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
refuel or add the following in the case of gaso‐
line engines:
▷ Leaded gasoline.
▷ Metallic additives, e.g., manganese or iron.
Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐
ing with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.◀
ATTENTION
Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel sys‐
tem and the engine. There is a risk of damage
to property. Do not use a fuel with a higher
ethanol percentage than recommended or one
with other types of alcohol, e.g., M5 to M100.◀
ATTENTION
Fuel that does not comply with the mini‐
mum quality can compromise engine function
or cause engine damage. There is a risk of
damage to property. Do not fill with fuel that
does not comply with the minimum quality.◀
Seite 200
Mobility Fuel
200
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
CAUTION
The use of poor-quality fuels may result
in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi‐
tionally, problems relating to drivability, start‐
ing and stalling, especially under certain envi‐
ronmental conditions such as high ambient
temperature and high altitude, may occur.
If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
gine deposits, it is highly recommended to
purchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in the need for unscheduled main‐
tenance.◀
Recommended fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 91.
Minimum fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 89.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high outside temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
Diesel
Information
ATTENTION
Do not press the Start/Stop button after
refueling with the wrong fuel. There is a risk of
damage to property.
Observe the following for diesel engines:
▷ Use only Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel. Maxi‐
mum content of biodiesel: 5 %, B5.
▷ Do not use rapeseed methyl ester RME.
▷ Do not use biodiesel above 5 %, B5.
▷ Do not use gasoline.
▷ No diesel additives.
Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐
ing with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.◀
Low-Sulfur Diesel
The engine of your BMW is designed for diesel
with low sulfur content:
Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel ASTM D 975-xx.
xx: comply with the current standard in each
case.
Use only Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel.
The fraction of biodiesel in the fuel must not
exceed 5 %, referred to as B5. Do not use gas‐
oline. If you do fill the tank with the wrong fuel,
e.g., gasoline, do not start the engine as this
may damage the engine.
In the case of incorrect refueling, contact a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop or Roadside As‐
sistance.
If the fuel pump nozzle does not fit in the filler
pipe of your BMW, please check to ensure that
you are refueling at a diesel fuel pump that is
equipped with a diesel fuel pump nozzle.
In the event the Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel fuel
cannot be fully inserted into the fuel filler neck,
please contact BMW Roadside Assistance for
instructions on how to add fuel.
For additional information regarding Roadside
Assistance, refer to Owner's Manual for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment and Communication.
Seite 201
Fuel Mobility
201
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
BMW Advanced Diesel
The concept
BMW Advanced Diesel reduces nitrogen ox‐
ides in the diesel emissions by injecting diesel
exhaust fluid into the exhaust system. A chem‐
ical reaction takes place inside the catalytic
converter that minimizes nitrogen oxides.
The vehicle has a tank system that can be refil‐
led.
To be able to start the engine as usual, there
must be an adequate diesel exhaust fluid.
Warming up the system
In order to warm the engine up to its operating
temperature after a cold start, the Steptronic
transmission may subsequently shift up to the
next higher gear.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Reserve indication
This display in the instrument cluster provides
information about the distance that can still be
driven with the current reserve level.
Do not continue driving to the limit of the re‐
maining travel distance. It is not possible to re‐
start the engine after switching it off.
▷ Lamp white: refill with diesel
exhaust fluid at the next op‐
portunity.
▷ Lamp yellow: not enough
diesel exhaust fluid present.
The remaining range is dis‐
played in the instrument
cluster. Immediately refill
with diesel exhaust fluid.
Diesel exhaust fluid on minimum
▷ The remaining range is dis‐
played in the instrument
cluster: add diesel exhaust
fluid. The engine will con‐
tinue to run as long as it is
not switched off and all
other operating conditions
are satisfied; sufficient fuel,
for example.
System malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed when
there is a system not working.
Have the diesel exhaust fluid
replenished
BMW recommends that diesel exhaust fluid be
added by the dealer’s service center within the
course of regular maintenance.
In addition it may be necessary to have the
fluid replenished several times under particular
circumstances, for example, if the vehicle is
driven in a particularly sporty style or if it is
driven at high altitudes.
The diesel exhaust fluid must be replenished
as soon as the reserve display appears in the
instrument cluster to avoid not being able to
restart the engine.
Diesel exhaust fluid at low
temperatures
Due to its physical properties, it is possible
that the diesel exhaust fluid may also need to
be replenished between regular maintenance
appointments if it is exposed to temperatures
under + 23 ℉/- 5 ℃. In this case, add diesel ex‐
haust fluid only immediately before driving off.
At temperatures below + 12 ℉/- 11 ℃, the fill‐
ing level cannot be measured in some cases.
Replenishing diesel exhaust fluid
yourself in exceptional cases
General information
You can replenish diesel exhaust fluid yourself
in exceptional cases, for example, to get to
your scheduled service.
Seite 202
Mobility Fuel
202
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Information
WARNING
Small amounts of ammonia fumes can
escape when opening the diesel exhaust fluid
container. Ammonia fumes have a pungent
odor and irritate skin, mucous membranes, and
eyes. There is a risk of injury. Do not inhale es‐
caping ammonia fumes. Avoid the contact of
articles of clothing, skin or eyes with diesel ex‐
haust fluid. Do not swallow any diesel exhaust
fluid. Keep children away from diesel exhaust
fluids.◀
WARNING
Operating materials, e.g., oils, greases,
coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredi‐
ents. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
Observe the instructions on the containers.
Avoid the contact of articles of clothing, skin or
eyes with operating materials. Do not refill op‐
erating materials into different bottles. Store
operating materials out of reach of children.◀
ATTENTION
The diesel exhaust fluid ingredients are
very aggressive. There is a risk of damage to
property. Avoid contact of diesel exhaust fluid
with surfaces of the vehicle.◀
Suitable diesel exhaust fluid
▷ Recommended: BMW Diesel Exhaust
Fluid. With this bottle and its special
adapter, diesel exhaust fluid can be replen‐
ished simply and safely.
▷ Alternatively recommended: NOx Diesel
exhaust fluid AUS 32.
Diesel exhaust fluid can be purchased at a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Refill quantity
When the Reserve display starts, add at least
3 bottles of diesel exhaust fluid.
This corresponds to approx. 1.5 US gal/6 liters.
Tank for diesel exhaust fluid
The fuel cap for diesel exhaust fluids is next to
the fuel cap for the fuel tank.
Adding the diesel exhaust fluid
Add the diesel exhaust fluid when the ignition
is switched on.
1.
Open the fuel filler flap, refer to page 198.
2. Turn the fuel cap of the diesel exhaust fluid
tank counterclockwise and remove.
3. Place the bottle on it and turn it as far as it
will go, see arrow.
4. Press the bottle down, see arrow.
The vehicle tank will be filled.
Seite 203
Fuel Mobility
203
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
The tank is full when the fill level in the bot‐
tle no longer changes. It is not possible to
overfill.
5. Pull back the bottle, see arrow, and un‐
screw it.
6. Replace the fuel cap and turn it clockwise.
7. Close the fuel filler flap.
Filling with an incorrect fluid
Information
WARNING
After adding an incorrect fluid, e.g., anti‐
freeze for washer fluid, the system can heat
and ignite. There is risk of fire and injuries. Do
not add incorrect fluids. Do not start the engine
after adding an incorrect fluid.◀
A Check Control message is displayed when
an incorrect fluid is added.
In the case that an incorrect liquid was refilled,
contact a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Disposing of bottles
Diesel exhaust fluid bottles can be dis‐
posed of at a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Do not dispose of empty bottles with house‐
hold waste unless this is permitted by local
regulations.
Reserve indication
The Reserve display will still ap‐
pear along with the remaining
range after refilling.
Engine can be started.
After several minutes of driving,
the Reserve indication goes out.
Diesel exhaust fluid on minimum
After filling, the indicator is still
displayed.
The engine can only be started
after the indicator goes out.
1.
Switch on the ignition.
The indicator goes out after approx. 1 mi‐
nute.
2. Engine can be started.
Seite 204
Mobility Fuel
204
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Wheels and tires
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Tire inflation pressure
Safety information
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐
sure influence the following:
▷ The service life of the tires.
▷ Road safety.
▷ Driving comfort.
Checking the tire inflation pressure
WARNING
A tire with low or missing tire inflation
pressure impacts handling, such as steering
and braking response. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Regularly check the tire inflation pres‐
sure, and correct it as needed, e.g., twice a
month and before a long trip.◀
Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire in‐
flation pressure.
Tires heat up while driving, and the tire infla‐
tion pressure increases along with the tire's
temperature. The tire inflation pressure speci‐
fications relate to cold tires or tires with the
ambient temperature.
Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after driving no more
than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours.
The displays of inflation devices may under-
read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.
For Flat Tire Monitor: after correcting the tire
inflation pressure, reinitialize the Flat Tire
Monitor.
For Tire Pressure Monitor: after correcting the
tire inflation pressure, reset the Tire Pressure
Monitor.
Tire inflation pressure specifications
The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 206, contains all tire inflation pressure
specifications for the specified tire sizes at the
ambient temperature. The tire inflation pres‐
sure values apply to tire sizes approved by the
manufacturer of the vehicle for the vehicle
type.
To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
please note the following:
▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.
Tire inflation pressures up to
100 mph/160 km/h
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer
to page 206, and adjust as necessary.
Seite 205
Wheels and tires Mobility
205
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
These pressure values can also be found on
the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's
door pillar.
Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.
Tire inflation pressure values up to
100 mph/160 km/h
X3 sDrive28i, X3 xDrive28i,
X3 xDrive28d
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
245/55 R 17 102 H
M+S RSC
2.2 / 32 2.2 / 32
225/60 R 17 99 H
M+S RSC
245/50 R 18 100 H
M+S RSC
245/50 R 18 100 V
M+S A/S RSC
2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35
245/45 R 19 102 V
M+S XL A/S RSC
245/45 R 19 102 V
M+S XL RSC
2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38
Front: 245/45 R 19
98 W RSC
2.2 / 32 -
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Rear: 275/40 R 19
101 W RSC
- 2.2 / 32
Front: 245/40 R 20
99 Y XL Std/RSC
2.2 / 32 -
Rear: 275/35 R 20
102 Y XL Std/RSC
- 2.4 / 35
Front: 245/40 ZR
20 99 Y XL Std
2.2 / 32 -
Rear: 275/35 ZR 20
102 Y XL Std
- 2.4 / 35
Front: 245/35 R 21
96 Y XL RSC
2.5 / 36 -
Rear: 275/30 R 21
98 Y XL RSC
- 2.9 /42
Emergency wheel:
T 135/80 R 18 104
M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
X3 xDrive35i
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
245/50 R 18 100 H
M+S RSC
245/50 R 18 100 V
M+S A/S RSC
2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35
245/45 R 19 102 V
M+S XL A/S RSC
245/45 R 19 102 V
M+S XL RSC
2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38
Seite 206
Mobility Wheels and tires
206
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Front: 245/45 R 19
98 W RSC
2.2 / 32 -
Rear: 275/40 R 19
101 W RSC
- 2.2 / 32
Front: 245/40 R 20
99 Y XL Std/RSC
2.2 / 32 -
Rear: 275/35 R 20
102 Y XL Std/RSC
- 2.4 / 35
Front: 245/40 ZR
20 99 Y XL Std
2.2 / 32 -
Rear: 275/35 ZR 20
102 Y XL Std
- 2.4 / 35
Front: 245/35 R 21
96 Y XL RSC
2.5 / 36 -
Rear: 275/30 R 21
98 Y XL RSC
- 2.9 /42
Emergency wheel:
T 135/80 R 18 104
M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
Tire inflation pressures at max.
speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
WARNING
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe,
and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for
speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the
relevant table on the following pages. Other‐
wise, tire damage and accidents could occur.◀
Tire inflation pressure values over
100 mph/160 km/h
X3 sDrive28i, X3 xDrive28i,
X3 xDrive28d
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
245/55 R 17 102 H
M+S RSC
2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38
225/60 R 17 99 H
M+S RSC
245/50 R 18 100 H
M+S RSC
245/50 R 18 100 V
M+S A/S RSC
2.4 / 35 2.8 / 41
245/45 R 19 102 V
M+S XL A/S RSC
245/45 R 19 102 V
M+S XL RSC
2.6 / 38 3.0 / 44
Front: 245/45 R 19
98 W RSC
2.4 / 35 -
Rear: 275/40 R 19
101 W RSC
- 2.6 / 38
Front: 245/40 R 20
99 Y XL Std/RSC
2.4 / 35 -
Rear: 275/35 R 20
102 Y XL Std/RSC
- 2.6 / 38
Front: 245/40 ZR
20 99 Y XL Std
2.4 / 35 -
Rear: 275/35 ZR 20
102 Y XL Std
- 2.6 / 38
Front: 245/35 R 21
96 Y XL RSC
2.8 / 41 -
Seite 207
Wheels and tires Mobility
207
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Rear: 275/30 R 21
98 Y XL RSC
- 3.2 / 46
Emergency wheel:
T 135/80 R 18 104
M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
X3 xDrive35i
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
245/50 R 18 100 H
M+S RSC
245/50 R 18 100 V
M+S A/S RSC
2.6 / 38 3.0 / 44
245/45 R 19 102 V
M+S XL A/S RSC
245/45 R 19 102 V
M+S XL RSC
2.8 / 41 3.2 / 46
Front: 245/45 R 19
98 W RSC
2.4 / 35 -
Rear: 275/40 R 19
101 W RSC
- 2.8 / 41
Front: 245/40 R 20
99 Y XL Std/RSC
2.4 / 35 -
Rear: 275/35 R 20
102 Y XL Std/RSC
- 2.8 / 41
Front: 245/40 ZR
20 99 Y XL Std
2.4 / 35 -
Rear: 275/35 ZR 20
102 Y XL Std
- 2.8 / 41
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Front: 245/35 R 21
96 Y XL RSC
2.8 / 41 -
Rear: 275/30 R 21
98 Y XL RSC
- 3.2 / 46
Emergency wheel:
T 135/80 R 18 104
M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
Tire identification marks
Tire size
245/45 R 18 96 Y
245: nominal width in mm
45: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code
18: rim diameter in inches
96: load rating, not for ZR tires
Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
Speed letter
Q = up to 100 mph, 160 km/h
R = up to 106 mph, 170 km/h
S = up to 112 mph, 180 km/h
T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 0116
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
xxx: tire size and tire design
0116: tire age
Seite 208
Mobility Wheels and tires
208
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the U.S. Department of Transportation.
Tire age
DOT … 0116: the tire was manufactured in the
1st week of 2016.
Recommendation
Regardless of wear and tear, replace tires at
least every 6 years.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA;
Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades
Treadwear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger car tires must conform to Fed‐
eral Safety Requirements in addition to these
grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
ernment test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g,
times as well on the government course as a
tire graded 100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart signifi‐
cantly from the norm due to variations in driv‐
ing habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐
terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds
to a level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band
A represent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel than the minimum re‐
quired by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is es‐
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.◀
RSC – Run-flat tires
Run-flat tires, refer to page 212, are labeled
with a circular symbol containing the letters
RSC marked on the sidewall.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
weather performance than summer tires.
Seite 209
Wheels and tires Mobility
209
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Tire tread
Summer tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.12 inches/3 mm.
There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if
the tire tread depth is less than 0.12 in‐
ches/3 mm.
Winter tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.16 inches/4 mm.
Below a tread depth of 0.16 inches/4 mm, tires
are less suitable for winter operation.
Minimum tread depth
Wear indicators are distributed around the
tire's circumference and have the legally re‐
quired minimum height of 0.063 in‐
ches/1.6 mm.
They are marked on the side of the tire with
TWI, Tread Wear Indicator.
Tire damage
General information
Inspect your tires regularly for damage, foreign
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Information
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces,
as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles
can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and
suspension parts. This is more likely to occur
with low-profile tires, which provide less cush‐
ioning between the wheel and the road. Be
careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your
speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped
with low-profile tires.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal‐
functions:
▷ Unusual vibrations while driving.
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐
dency to pull to the left or right.
Damage can, e. g., be caused by driving over
curbs, road damage, or similar things.
WARNING
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation
pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle
control. There is risk of an accident. If tire dam‐
age is suspected while driving, immediately re‐
duce speed and stop. Have wheels and tires
checked. For this purpose, drive carefully to
the nearest dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop. Have
vehicle towed or transported as needed.◀
WARNING
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation
pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle
control. There is risk of an accident. Do not re‐
pair damaged tires, but have them replaced.◀
Changing wheels and tires
Mounting
Have mounting and wheel balancing carried
out by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Wheel and tire combination
You can ask the dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop
about the right wheel/tire combination and
wheel rim versions for the vehicle.
Seite 210
Mobility Wheels and tires
210
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair
the function of a variety of systems such as
ABS or DSC.
To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐
sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐
figuration from a single manufacturer.
Following tire damage, have the original wheel
and tire combination remounted on the vehicle
as soon as possible.
WARNING
Wheels and tires which are not suitable
for your vehicle can damage parts of the vehi‐
cle, e.g., due to contact with the body due to
tolerances despite the same official size rating.
There is risk of an accident. The manufacturer
of your vehicle strongly suggests that you use
wheels and tires that have been recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer for your vehicle
type.◀
Recommended tire brands
For each tire size, BMW recommends certain
tire brands. These can be identified by a star
on the tire sidewall.
New tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
they achieve their full traction potential after a
break-in time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Retreaded tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
WARNING
Retreaded tires can have different tire
casing structures. With advanced age the serv‐
ice life can be limited. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. The manufacturer of your vehicle does
not recommend the use of retreaded tires.◀
Winter tires
Winter tires are recommended for operating on
winter roads.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro‐
vide better winter traction than summer tires,
they do not provide the same level of perform‐
ance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then a respective symbol is displayed in your
field of vision. The label is available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
With mounted winter tires, observe and adhere
to the permissible maximum speed.
Run-flat tires
If you are already using run-flat tires, for your
own safety you should replace them only with
the same kind. No spare tire is available in the
case of a flat tire. Further information is availa‐
ble from a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Rotating wheels between axles
Different wear patterns can occur on the front
and rear axles depending on individual driving
conditions. The tires can be rotated between
the axles to achieve even wear. Further infor‐
mation is available from a dealer’s service cen‐
ter or another qualified service center or repair
Seite 211
Wheels and tires Mobility
211
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
shop. After rotating, check the tire pressure
and correct if needed.
Rotating the tires between the axes is not per‐
missible on vehicles with different tire sizes or
rim sizes on the front and rear axles.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease and fuels.
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
Run-flat tires
Label
RSC label on the tire sidewall.
The wheels consist of tires that are self-sup‐
porting, to a limited degree, and possibly spe‐
cial rims.
The support of the sidewall allows the tire to
remain drivable to a restricted degree in the
event of a tire inflation pressure loss.
Follow the instructions for continued driving
with a flat tire.
Changing run-flat tires
For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No
spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire.
A dealer’s service center will be glad to answer
additional questions at any time.
Repairing a flat tire
Safety measures
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible
from passing traffic and on solid ground.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by
setting the parking brake.
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front
wheels are in the straight-ahead position
and engage the steering wheel lock.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
appropriate distance.
Mobility System
The concept
With the Mobility System, minor tire damage
can be sealed temporarily to enable continued
travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped
into the tires, which seals the damage from the
inside.
The compressor can be used to check the tire
inflation pressure.
Information
▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobi‐
lity System found on the compressor and
sealant container.
▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐
tive if the tire puncture measures approx.
1/8 in/4 mm or more.
▷ Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair
shop if the tire cannot be made drivable.
▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies
that have penetrated the tire.
Seite 212
Mobility Wheels and tires
212
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant
container and apply it to the steering
wheel.
▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM
wheel electronics. In this case, have the
electronics checked at the next opportu‐
nity and have them replaced if needed.
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐
tain carbon monoxide, an odorless and color‐
less but highly toxic gas. In enclosed areas, ex‐
haust gases can also accumulate outside of
the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the
exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventila‐
tion.◀
Storage
The Mobility System is located under the
cargo floor panel.
Sealant container
▷ Sealant container, arrow 1.
▷ Filling hose, arrow 2.
Observe use-by date on the sealant container.
Compressor
1 Holder for sealant container
2 Compressor
3 Connector/cable for socket
4 Connection hose
5 On/off switch
6 Inflation pressure dial
7 Reduce inflation pressure
Filling the tire with sealant
1.
Shake the sealant container.
2. Pull the connection hose fully out of the
compressor housing. Do not kink the hose.
Seite 213
Wheels and tires Mobility
213
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
3. Screw the connection hose onto the con‐
nector of the sealant container.
4. Insert the sealant container on the com‐
pressor housing in an upright position.
5. Screw the filling hose of the sealant con‐
tainer onto the tire valve of the nonworking
wheel.
6. With the compressor switched off, insert
the plug into the power socket inside the
vehicle.
7. With the ignition turned on or the engine
running, switch on the compressor.
ATTENTION
The compressor can overheat during ex‐
tended operation. There is a risk of damage to
property. Do not run the compressor for more
than 10 min.◀
Let the compressor run for approx. 3 to 8 mi‐
nutes to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a
tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.
While the tire is being filled with sealant, the
tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach
approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the compres‐
sor at this point.
If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar is not
reached:
1.
Switch off the compressor.
2. Unscrew the filling hose from the wheel.
3. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to dis‐
tribute the sealant in the tire.
4. Inflate the tire again using the compressor.
Seite 214
Mobility Wheels and tires
214
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar cannot be
reached, contact your dealer’s service cen‐
ter or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Stowing the Mobility System
1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant con‐
tainer from the wheel.
2. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
pressor from the sealant container.
3. Connect the filling hose of the sealant con‐
tainer previously connected to the tire
valve with the available connector on the
sealant container.
This prevents leftover sealant from escap‐
ing from the container.
4. Wrap the empty sealant container in suita‐
ble material to avoid dirtying the cargo
area.
5. Stow the Mobility System back in the vehi‐
cle.
Distributing the sealant
Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to en‐
sure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the
tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
If possible, do not drive at speeds less than
12 mph/20 km/h.
To correct the tire inflation pressure
1.
Stop at a suitable location.
2. Screw the connection hose of the com‐
pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.
3. Insert the connector into the power socket
inside the vehicle.
4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to
2.5 bar.
▷ Increase pressure: with the ignition
turned on or the engine running, switch
on the compressor.
▷ To reduce the pressure: press the but‐
ton on the compressor.
Continuing the trip
Do not exceed the maximum permissible
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.
Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant
container of the Mobility System as soon as
possible.
Snow chains
Fine-link snow chains
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types of
fine-link snow chains have been tested by the
manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended
as road-safe and suitable.
Information regarding suitable snow chains is
available from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Use
WARNING
With the mounting of snow chains on un‐
suitable tires, the snow chains can come into
contact with vehicle parts. There is a risk of ac‐
cidents or a risk of property damage. Only
mount snow chains on tires that are desig‐
nated by their manufacturer as suitable for the
use of snow chains.◀
Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped
with the tires of the following size:
▷ 205/65 R 17.
▷ 225/60 R 17.
▷ 245/50 R 18.
▷ 245/45 R 19.
Do not mount snow chains on size 245/55 R
17 tires.
Seite 215
Wheels and tires Mobility
215
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐
tions.
Make sure that the snow chains are always
sufficiently tight. Re-tighten as needed ac‐
cording to the snow chain manufacturer's in‐
structions.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
When driving with snow chains, briefly activate
Dynamic Traction Control if needed.
Maximum speed with snow chains
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h
when using snow chains.
Seite 216
Mobility Wheels and tires
216
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Engine compartment
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Important features in the engine compartment
1 Washer fluid reservoir
2 Vehicle identification number
3 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal
4 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal
5 Coolant reservoir
6 Oil filler neck
Hood
Information
WARNING
Improperly executed work in the engine
compartment can damage vehicle compo‐
nents and impair vehicle functions. There is a
risk of personal and property damage. The
manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that, in the effort to avoid such risks, work in
the engine compartment be performed by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.◀
Seite 217
Engine compartment Mobility
217
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
WARNING
The engine compartment accommo‐
dates moving components. Certain compo‐
nents in the engine compartment can also
move with the vehicle switched off, e.g., the ra‐
diator fan. There is a a risk of injury. Do not
reach into the area of moving parts. Keep arti‐
cles of clothing and hair away from moving
parts.◀
WARNING
There are protruding parts, e.g., locking
hook, on the inside of the hood. There is a a
risk of injury. If the hood is open, pay attention
to protruding parts and keep these areas
clear.◀
WARNING
An incorrectly locked hood can open
while driving and restrict visibility. There is risk
of an accident. Stop immediately and correctly
close the hood.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when open‐
ing and closing the hood. There is a a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the area of movement of
the hood is clear during opening and closing.◀
ATTENTION
Folded-away wipers can be jammed
when the hood is opened. There is a risk of
damage to property. Make sure that the wipers
with the wiper blades mounted are folded
down onto the windshield before opening the
hood.◀
Opening the hood
1. Pull the lever.
2. Press the release handle and open the
hood.
3. Be careful of protruding parts on the hood.
Seite 218
Mobility Engine compartment
218
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Closing the hood
Let the hood drop from a height of approx.
16 inches/40 cm and push down on it to lock it
fully.
The hood must engage.
Seite 219
Engine compartment Mobility
219
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Engine oil
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
General information
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
the driving style and driving conditions.
The engine oil consumption can increase in
the following situations, for example:
▷ Sporty driving style.
▷ Break-in of the engine.
▷ Idling of the engine.
▷ With use of engine oil types that are classi‐
fied as not suitable.
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level
after refueling.
The vehicle is equipped with electronic oil
measurement.
The electronic oil measurement has two meas‐
uring principles:
▷ Status display.
▷ Detailed measurement.
Electronic oil measurement
Status display
The concept
The engine oil level is monitored electronically
while driving and shown on the Control Dis‐
play.
If the engine oil level reaches the minimum
level, a check control message is displayed.
Requirements
A current measured value is available after ap‐
prox. 30 minutes of driving. During a shorter
trip, the status of the last, sufficiently long trip
is displayed.
With frequent short-distance trips, regularly
perform a detailed measurement.
Displaying the engine oil level
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
Engine oil level display messages
Different messages appear on the display de‐
pending on the engine oil level. Pay attention
to these messages.
If the engine oil level is too low within the next
125 miles/200 km, add engine oil.
ATTENTION
Too low of an engine oil level causes en‐
gine damage. There is a risk of damage to
property. Immediately add engine oil.◀
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Seite 220
Mobility Engine oil
220
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
ATTENTION
Too much engine oil can damage the en‐
gine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk
of damage to property. Do not add too much
engine oil. When too much engine oil is added,
have oil level corrected by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.◀
Detailed measurement
The concept
In the detailed measurement the engine oil
level is checked when the vehicle is stationary,
and displayed via a scale.
Gasoline engine:
If the engine oil level reaches the minimum
level, a check control message is displayed.
Diesel engine:
If the engine oil level reaches the minimum
level or an overfilling is detected, a check con‐
trol message is displayed.
During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐
creased somewhat.
General information
A detailed measurement is only possible with
certain engines.
Requirements
▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever in
selector lever position N or P and accelera‐
tor pedal not depressed.
▷ Engine is running and is at operating tem‐
perature.
Performing a detailed measurement
In order to perform a detailed measurement of
the engine oil level:
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Measure engine oil level"
4. "Start measurement"
The engine oil level is checked and displayed
via a scale.
Time: approx. 1 minute.
Adding engine oil
Information
WARNING
Operating materials, e.g., oils, greases,
coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredi‐
ents. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
Observe the instructions on the containers.
Avoid the contact of articles of clothing, skin or
eyes with operating materials. Do not refill op‐
erating materials into different bottles. Store
operating materials out of reach of children.◀
ATTENTION
Too low of an engine oil level causes en‐
gine damage. There is a risk of damage to
property.
Add engine oil within the next
125 miles/200 km.◀
ATTENTION
Too much engine oil can damage the en‐
gine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk
of damage to property. Do not add too much
engine oil. When too much engine oil is added,
have oil level corrected by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.◀
General information
Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster. The quantity
to be added is indicated in the message dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Switch off the ignition and safely park the vehi‐
cle before engine oil is added.
Seite 221
Engine oil Mobility
221
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Overview
The oil filler neck is located in the engine com‐
partment, refer to page 217.
Opening the oil filler neck
1. Open the hood, refer to page 217.
2. Turn the oil filler neck counter-clockwise.
3. Add engine oil.
Engine oil types to add
Information
ATTENTION
Oil additives can damage the engine.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
use oil additives.◀
ATTENTION
Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunc‐
tions in the engine or damage it. There is a risk
of damage to property. When selecting an en‐
gine oil, make sure that the engine oil has the
correct viscosity grade.◀
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of
the engine.
Viscosity grades
Gasoline engine:
When selecting an engine oil, make sure that
the engine oil has the viscosity grade SAE
0W-30 or SAE 0W-20. Alternatively, also en‐
gine oils with viscosity grades SAE 5W-20,
SAE 5W-30, SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 can
be used.
The viscosity grades SAE 0W-20 or SAE
5W-20 are only suitable for particular engines.
Diesel engine:
When selecting an engine oil, make sure that
the engine oil has the viscosity grade SAE
0W-30. Alternatively, also engine oils with vis‐
cosity grades SAE 5W-30, SAE 0W-40 or SAE
5W-40 can be used.
More information about suitable engine oil rat‐
ings and viscosities of engine oils can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Suitable engine oil types
You can add engine oils that meet the follow‐
ing oil rating standards:
Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
BMW Longlife-14 FE+.
The oil rating BMW Longlife-14 FE+ is only
suitable for particular gasoline motors.
Diesel engine
BMW Longlife-12 FE.
More information about suitable engine oil rat‐
ings and viscosities of engine oils is available
at a dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Alternative engine oil types
If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is
not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an en‐
gine oil with the following oil rating can be
added:
Seite 222
Mobility Engine oil
222
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01.
API SL or superior oil rating.
Diesel engine
BMW Longlife-04.
API SL or superior oil rating.
Engine oil change
ATTENTION
Engine oil that is not changed in timely
fashion can cause increased engine wear and
thus engine damage. There is a risk of damage
to property. Do not exceed the service data in‐
dicated in the vehicle.◀
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you have a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop change
the engine oil.
Seite 223
Engine oil Mobility
223
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Coolant
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Information
WARNING
With the engine hot and the cooling sys‐
tem open, coolant can escape and lead to
scalding. There is a a risk of injury. Only open
the cooling system with the engine cooled
down.◀
WARNING
Additives are harmful and incorrect addi‐
tives can damage the engine. There is a risk of
injury and risk of property damage. Do not al‐
low additives to come into contact with skin,
eyes or articles of clothing. Use suitable addi‐
tives only.◀
Coolant consists of water and additives.
Not all commercially available additives are
suitable for the vehicle. Information about suit‐
able additives is available from a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Coolant level
Overview
Depending on the engine installation, the cool‐
ant reservoir is located on the right side or the
left side of the engine compartment.
Checking
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess
pressure to dissipate, then open it.
3. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
4. The coolant level is correct if it lies be‐
tween the minimum and maximum marks
in the filler neck.
Seite 224
Mobility Coolant
224
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Adding
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess
pressure to dissipate, then open it.
3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up
to the specified level; do not overfill.
4. Turn the lid until there is an audible click.
The arrows on the coolant reservoir and
the lid must point towards one another.
5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐
nated as soon as possible.
Disposal
Comply with the relevant environmen‐
tal protection regulations when dispos‐
ing of coolant and coolant additives.
Seite 225
Coolant Mobility
225
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Maintenance
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
BMW maintenance system
The maintenance system indicates required
maintenance measures, and thereby provides
support in maintaining road safety and the op‐
erational reliability of the vehicle.
In some cases scopes and intervals may vary
according to the country-specific version. Re‐
placement work, spare parts, fuels and lubri‐
cants and wear materials are calculated sepa‐
rately. Further information is available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Condition Based Service
CBS
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐
count the driving conditions of the vehicle.
Based on this, Condition Based Service recog‐
nizes the maintenance requirements.
The system makes it possible to adapt the
amount of maintenance corresponding to your
user profile.
Information on service requirements can be
displayed on the Control Display.
Service data in the remote control
Information on the required maintenance is
continuously stored in the remote control. The
dealer’s service center can read this data out
and suggest a maintenance scope for the vehi‐
cle.
Therefore, hand the service advisor the remote
control with which the vehicle was driven most
recently.
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
count.
If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop
update the time-dependent maintenance pro‐
cedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if
necessary, changing the engine oil and the mi‐
crofilter/activated-charcoal filter.
Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for US
models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty In‐
formation Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐
els for additional information on service re‐
quirements.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that maintenance and repair be performed by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop. Records of regu‐
lar maintenance and repair work should be re‐
tained.
Seite 226
Mobility Maintenance
226
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnosis
Information
ATTENTION
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an
intricate component intended to be used in
conjunction with specialized equipment to
check the vehicle’s primary emissions system.
Improper use of the socket for Onboard Diag‐
nosis, or contact with the socket for Onboard
Diagnosis for other than its intended purpose,
can cause vehicle malfunctions and creates
risks of personal and property damage. Given
the foregoing, the manufacture of your vehicle
strongly recommends that access to the
socket for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a
dealer's service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop or other persons
that have the specialized training and equip‐
ment for purposes of properly utilizing the
socket for Onboard Diagnosis.◀
Position
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for
checking the primary components in the vehi‐
cle's emissions.
Emissions
▷ The warning lamp lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain
circumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive mis‐
firing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
system checked immediately; otherwise,
serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐
riod can seriously damage emission con‐
trol components, in particular the catalytic
converter.
Seite 227
Maintenance Mobility
227
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Replacing components
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Onboard vehicle tool kit
The onboard vehicle tool kit is located behind
the left folding cover in the cargo area.
Wiper blade replacement
Information
ATTENTION
If the wiper arm falls onto the windshield
without the wiper blades installed, the wind‐
shield can be damaged. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Secure the wiper arm when
replacing the wiper blades and do not fold
down the wipers without the wiper blades in‐
stalled.◀
Front: replacing the wiper blades
1. To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer
to page 78, the wiper arms.
2. Fold up the wipers.
3. Position the wiper blade in a horizontal po‐
sition.
4. Remove the wiper blade toward one side.
5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order
of removal until it locks in place.
6. Fold down the wipers.
Seite 228
Mobility Replacing components
228
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Rear: replacing the wiper blades
1. Lift off the wiper fully and pull off the wiper
blade, arrow.
2. Attach a new wiper blade. It must engage
audibly.
3. Fold down the wipers.
Lamp and bulb replacement
Information
Lights and bulbs
Lights and bulbs make an essential contribu‐
tion to vehicle safety.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you have appropriate work performed by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop if you are unfami‐
liar with it or if it has not been described here.
A spare lamp box is available from a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
WARNING
Bulbs can get hot during operation. Con‐
tact with the bulbs can cause burns. There is a
risk of injuries. Only change bulbs after they
have cooled off.◀
WARNING
Work on switched-on lighting systems
can cause short circuits. There is a risk of inju‐
ries or a risk of property damage. When work‐
ing on the lighting system, switch off the lamps
in question. If necessary, heed the bulb manu‐
facturer's instructions.◀
DANGER
There can be high voltage in the lighting
system. There is danger to life. The manufac‐
turer of your vehicle recommends that the
work on the lighting system including bulb re‐
placement be performed by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.◀
CAUTION
Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life.
There is a risk of property damage. Do not hold
new bulbs with your bare hands. Use a clean
cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by
its base.◀
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
Some items of equipment use light-emitting
diodes installed behind a cover as a light
source.
These light-emitting diodes, which are related
to conventional lasers, are officially designated
as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
WARNING
Too intensive brightness can irritate or
damage the retina of the eye. There is a a risk
of injury. Do not look directly into the head‐
lights or other light sources. Do not remove the
LED covers.◀
Headlight glass
Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐
ternal lights in cool or humid weather. When
driving with the lights switched on, the con‐
densation evaporates after a short time. The
headlight glass does not need to be changed.
If despite driving with the lights switched on,
increasing humidity forms, e. g. water droplets
in the lamp, the manufacturer of your vehicle
recommends having it checked by a dealer’s
Seite 229
Replacing components Mobility
229
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Headlight setting
The headlight adjustments can be affected by
changing lights and bulbs. After the headlight
adjustment was changed, have it checked and,
if necessary, corrected by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Front lights, bulb replacement
Halogen headlights
Overview
1 High beams/headlight flasher
2 Low beams
3 Turn signal/side marker light
4 Parking lights
5 Daytime running lights
Accessing the low beams and parking
lights
Follow general instructions, refer to page 229.
1.
Open the hood, refer to page 217.
2. Turn the cover counterclockwise and re‐
move.
3. The upper bulb is the low beam and the
lower bulb is the parking lamp.
Low beams
55-watt bulb, H7.
1.
Tip the connector with the bulb down
slightly and pull out carefully.
2. Pull the bulb off the connector and insert
the new bulb.
3. Install the new bulb in reverse order of re‐
moval.
4. Place the cover according to the arrow
markings on the headlight housing.
5. Close the headlight housing with the lid.
Parking lights
5-watt bulb, W5W.
1.
Remove the bulb holder.
2. Carefully remove the bulb from the socket.
3. Install the new bulb in reverse order of re‐
moval.
4. Place the cover according to the arrow
markings on the headlight housing.
5. Close the headlight housing with the lid.
Accessing the high beams/headlight
flasher and daytime running lights
Follow general instructions, refer to page 229.
1.
Open the hood, refer to page 217.
Seite 230
Mobility Replacing components
230
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
2. Turn the cover counterclockwise and re‐
move.
3. The upper bulb is the high beam/headlight
flasher and the lower bulb is the daytime
running lights.
High beams/headlight flasher
55-watt bulb, H7.
1.
Tip the connector with the bulb up slightly
and pull out carefully.
2. Pull the bulb off the connector and insert
the new bulb.
3. Install the new bulb in reverse order of re‐
moval.
4. Place the cover according to the arrow
markings on the headlight housing.
5. Close the headlight housing with the lid.
Daytime running lights
21-watt bulb, W21W.
1.
Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and
remove.
2. Carefully remove the bulb from the socket.
3. Install the new bulb in reverse order of re‐
moval.
4. Place the cover according to the arrow
markings on the headlight housing.
5. Close the headlight housing with the lid.
Xenon headlights
Information
DANGER
There can be high voltage in the lighting
system. There is danger to life. The manufac‐
turer of your vehicle recommends that the
work on the lighting system including bulb re‐
placement be performed by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.◀
Because of the long life of these bulbs, the
likelihood of failure is very low. Switching the
lights on and off frequently shortens their life.
If a bulb fails, turn on the front fog lamps and
continue the trip with great care. Comply with
local regulations.
For checking and adjusting headlamp aim,
contact a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Overview
1 Parking lights / daytime running lights
2 Low beams/high beams/headlight flasher
3 Turn signal/side marker light
Xenon headlights
Low beams and high beams are designed with
xenon technology.
The parking lights and daylight running lights
are made using LED technology.
Seite 231
Replacing components Mobility
231
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
LED headlights
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
With LED headlights, all front lights and side
indicators are designed with LED technology.
If an LED fails, switch on the front fog lamps
and continue the trip with great care. Comply
with local regulations.
In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Front fog lights
Follow general instructions, refer to page 229.
35-watt bulb, H8.
1.
Insert the screwdriver from the onboard
vehicle tool kit, with the flat side on the clip,
arrow 1.
2. Turn the screwdriver by 90°, arrow 2.
3. Remove the front fog lamp toward the
front.
4. Detach the connector.
5. Turn the bulb bracket and remove it.
6. Remove the bulb and replace it.
7. Proceed in reverse order to insert the front
fog lamp. Note the guide rails in doing so.
LED front fog lights
These front fog lights are made using LED
technology. In the case of a malfunction, con‐
tact a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
Turn signal
Information
Follow general instructions, refer to page 229.
The turn signals are located next to each low
beam in the engine compartment.
21-watt bulb, PY 21W.
Seite 232
Mobility Replacing components
232
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Replacement
1. Open the hood, refer to page 217.
2. Turn the bulb with the socket counter‐
clockwise and carefully remove.
3. Push the bulb down slightly and unscrew
from the socket.
4. To insert the new bulb, proceed in reverse
order of removal.
Turn signal in exterior mirror
The turn signals in the exterior mirrors feature
LED technology. In the case of a malfunction,
contact a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Tail lamps, bulb replacement
Overview
1 Turn signal
2 Backup lamp
3 Inside brake lamp
4 Rear lamp
5 Rear lamp/brake light
Bulb replacement, exterior tail lamps
General information
Follow general instructions, refer to page 229.
21-watt bulb, P21W.
With Adaptive Light Control or xenon head‐
lights: rear lamp features LED technology. In
the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Removing the exterior tail lamp
1.
Open the tailgate.
2. Insert the screwdriver from the onboard
vehicle tool kit between the cover and
body, push it up, arrow, and remove the
cover.
3. Release both nuts.
4. Remove the tail lamp from the body and
detach the connector.
Seite 233
Replacing components Mobility
233
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Replacing the bulbs
1. Release the three fasteners on the bulb
holder and remove the bulb holder from
the tail lamp.
2. Turn the bulb and remove it. The turn sig‐
nal is the upper bulb and the rear lamp/
brake lamp is the lower bulb on the bulb
holder.
3. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the
new bulb and attach the bulb holder. Make
sure that the bulb holder is engaged in all
fasteners.
Installing the tail lamp
1.
Connect and install the tail lamp.
2. Insert the cover with the three mountings
in the tail lamp. While applying pressure on
the top and bottom bracket, slide the cover
down to the stop.
Lights in the tailgate
General information
Follow general instructions, refer to page 229.
Reversing lights: 16-watt bulb, W16W.
Inner brake lamp: 21-watt bulb, H21W.
Accessing the lights
1.
Open the tailgate.
2. Pull out the cover at the recessed grip, ar‐
row.
3. Detach the connector.
Replacing the reversing lamp and inner
brake lamp
1.
Detach the bulb holder from the tail lamp.
The reversing lamp is the upper bulb and
the inner brake lamp is the lower bulb on
the bulb holder.
2. To replace the reversing lamp, pull off the
bulb carefully.
To replace the inner brake lamp, push the
bulb down and turn it to the left.
Installing the bulb holder
1.
Attach the connector to the tail lamp.
2. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the
new bulb and attach the bulb holder.
Ensure that the bulb holder is firmly at‐
tached.
License plate lights
Follow general instructions, refer to page 229.
These lights are made using LED technology.
In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Seite 234
Mobility Replacing components
234
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Changing wheels/tires
General information
When using run-flat tires or sealants, a tire
does not need to be changed immediately in
the event of pressure loss due to a flat tire.
No spare tire is provided with your vehicle.
If needed, the tools for changing wheels are
available as accessories from a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Jacking points for the vehicle jack
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
cated at the positions shown.
Vehicle battery
Maintenance
The battery is maintenance-free.
The added amount of acid is sufficient for the
service life of the battery.
More information about the battery can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Battery replacement
ATTENTION
Vehicle batteries that are not compatible
can damage vehicle systems and impair vehi‐
cle functions. There is a risk of personal and
property damage. Only vehicle batteries that
are compatible with your vehicle type should
be installed in your vehicle. Information on
compatible vehicle batteries is available at your
dealer’s service center.◀
After a battery replacement, the manufacturer
of your vehicle recommends that the vehicle
battery be registered on the vehicle by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop to ensure that all
comfort features are fully available and that any
Check Control messages of these comfort fea‐
tures are no longer displayed.
Charging the battery
General information
Make sure that the battery is always suffi‐
ciently charged to guarantee that the battery
remains usable for its full service life.
The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐
lowing cases:
▷ When making frequent short-distance
drives.
▷ If the vehicle is not used for more than a
month.
Information
ATTENTION
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12 volt on-board net‐
work can be overloaded or damaged. There is
a risk of damage to property. Only connect
battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the
starting aid terminals in the engine compart‐
ment.◀
Starting aid terminals
In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the
starting aid terminals, refer to page 239, in the
engine compartment with the engine off.
Seite 235
Replacing components Mobility
235
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Power failure
After a power loss, some equipment needs to
be newly initialized or individual settings up‐
dated, for example:
▷ Seat and mirror memory: store the posi‐
tions again.
▷ Time: update.
▷ Date: update.
▷ Glass sunroof: initialize the system, refer to
page 52.
Disposing of old batteries
Have old batteries disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop
or take them to a collection point.
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
transport and storage. Secure the battery so
that it does not tip over during transport.
Fuses
Information
WARNING
Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload
electrical lines and components. There is risk
of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse.
Do not replace a nonworking fuse with a sub‐
stitute of another color or amperage rating.◀
Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse
types and locations are stored in the fuse box
in the cargo area.
In the glove compartment
Swing the cover down, arrow.
In the cargo area
Open the cover on the right side trim, arrow,
and remove the sound insulation.
Information on the fuse types and locations is
found on a separate sheet.
Seite 236
Mobility Replacing components
236
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Hazard warning flashers
The button is located in the center console.
Intelligent emergency call
The concept
In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re‐
quest can be made through this system.
General information
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
For technical reasons, the Emergency Request
cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable con‐
ditions.
Overview
SOS button in the roofliner
Requirements
▷ The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has
been activated.
▷ The radio-ready state is switched on.
▷ The Assist system is functional.
Initiating an Emergency Request
1.
Press the cover briefly to open it.
2. Press the SOS button until the LED at the
button lights up green.
▷ The LED lights up green: an Emergency
Request was initiated.
If a cancel prompt appears on the display,
the Emergency Request can be aborted.
If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle
until the voice connection has been estab‐
lished.
▷ The LED flashes green when a connection
to the BMW Response Center has been
established.
When the Emergency Request is received
at the BMW Response Center, the BMW
Response Center contacts you and takes
further steps to help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the
BMW Response Center can take further
Seite 237
Breakdown assistance Mobility
237
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
steps to help you under certain circum‐
stances.
For this, data are transmitted to the BMW
Response Center which serve to deter‐
mine the necessary rescue measures. E.g.
the current position of the vehicle, if it can
be established.
▷ If the LED is flashing green, but the BMW
Response Center can no longer be heard
via the speaker, you can nevertheless still
be heard at the BMW Response Center.
Initiating an Emergency Request
automatically
Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐
quest is automatically initiated immediately af‐
ter a severe accident. Automatic Collision Noti‐
fication is not affected by pressing the SOS
button.
Roadside Assistance
Service availability
Roadside Assistance can be reached around
the clock in many countries. You can obtain as‐
sistance there in the event of a vehicle break‐
down.
Roadside Assistance
The Roadside Assistance phone number can
be viewed on the iDrive or a connection to
Roadside Assistance can be established di‐
rectly.
Warning triangle
The warning triangle is located behind the left-
hand cover in the cargo area.
To remove, loosen the bracket.
First-aid kit
Information
Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents
regularly and replace any expired items
promptly.
Storage
The first-aid kit is located behind the left-hand
cover in the cargo area.
Jump-starting
General information
If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
started using the battery of another vehicle
Seite 238
Mobility Breakdown assistance
238
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca‐
bles with fully insulated clamp handles.
Information
DANGER
Contact with live components can lead to
an electric shock. There is a risk of injury or
danger to life. Do not touch any components
that are under voltage.◀
To prevent personal injury or damage to both
vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐
dure.
Preparation
ATTENTION
In the case of body contact between the
two vehicles, a short circuit can occur during
jump-starting. There is a risk of damage to
property. Make sure that no body contact oc‐
curs.◀
1.
Check whether the battery of the other ve‐
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage
information can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐
cle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power
consumers in both vehicles.
Starting aid terminals
WARNING
If the jumper cables are connected in the
incorrect order, sparks formation can occur.
There is a a risk of injury. Pay attention to the
correct order during connection.◀
The starting aid terminal in the engine com‐
partment acts as the battery's positive termi‐
nal.
The body ground or a special nut acts as the
battery negative terminal.
Connecting the cables
1.
Pull off the lid of the BMW starting aid ter‐
minal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting
aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis‐
tance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end
of the cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting
aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of
the battery, or to the corresponding engine
or body ground of assisting vehicle.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the
negative terminal of the battery, or to the
Seite 239
Breakdown assistance Mobility
239
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
corresponding engine or body ground of
the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle
and let it run for several minutes at an in‐
creased idle speed.
If the vehicle to be started has a diesel en‐
gine: let the engine of the assisting vehicle
run for approx. 10 minutes.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be
started in the usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not success‐
ful, wait a few minutes before making an‐
other attempt in order to allow the dis‐
charged battery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re‐
verse order.
Check the battery and recharge if needed.
Tow-starting and towing
Information
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
e.g., approach control warning with light brak‐
ing function. There is risk of an accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
tow-starting/towing.◀
Steptronic transmission: transporting
the vehicle
Information
The vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
ATTENTION
The vehicle can be damaged when tow‐
ing the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There is
a risk of damage to property. The vehicle
should only be transported on a loading plat‐
form.◀
Tow truck
The vehicle should only be transported on a
loading platform.
ATTENTION
When lifting the vehicle by the tow fitting
or body and chassis parts; damage can occur
on vehicle parts. There is a risk of damage to
property. Lift vehicle using suitable means.◀
Use tow fitting located in the front only for po‐
sitioning the vehicle.
Pushing vehicle
To maneuver vehicle from the danger area,
electronically unlock the transmission lock, re‐
fer to page 82, if needed.
Towing other vehicles
Information
WARNING
If the approved gross vehicle weight of
the towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to
be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will
not be possible to control the vehicle's re‐
sponse. There is risk of an accident! Make sure
Seite 240
Mobility Breakdown assistance
240
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
that the gross vehicle weight of the towing ve‐
hicle is heavier than the vehicle to be towed.◀
ATTENTION
If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in‐
correctly, damage to other vehicle parts can
occur. There is a risk of damage to property.
Correctly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the
tow fitting.◀
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐
pending on local regulations.
▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearly
identify the vehicle being towed by placing
a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐
dow.
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting
the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe
the following:
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going
around corners.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is secured with an offset.
Tow rope
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure
that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated stresses
on the vehicle components when towing, al‐
ways use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Tow fitting
General information
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐
ried in the vehicle.
The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front
or rear of the vehicle.
The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool kit,
refer to page 228, are together in the cargo
area.
Information
ATTENTION
If the tow fitting is not used as intended,
there can be damage to the vehicle or to the
tow fitting. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Observe the notes on using the tow fit‐
ting.◀
Use of the tow fitting:
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the
vehicle and screw it all the way in.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
roads only.
▷ Use tow fitting located in the front only for
positioning the vehicle.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for
example, do not lift the vehicle by the tow
fitting.
Seite 241
Breakdown assistance Mobility
241
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Screw thread for tow fitting
Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to
push it out.
Tow-starting
Steptronic transmission
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to
the Steptronic transmission.
Have the cause of the starting problems fixed.
Seite 242
Mobility Breakdown assistance
242
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Care
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Car washes
General information
Regularly remove foreign objects such as
leaves in the area below the windshield when
the hood is raised.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in
winter. Intense soiling and road salt can dam‐
age the vehicle.
Steam blaster and high-pressure
washer
Information
ATTENTION
When cleaning with high-pressure wash‐
ers, components can be damaged due to the
pressure or temperatures being too high.
There is a risk of damage to property. Maintain
sufficient distance and do not spray too long
continuously. Follow the operating instructions
for the high-pressure washer.◀
Distances and temperature
▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.
▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras,
seals: 12 inches/30 cm.
▷ Minimum distance from glass sunroof:
31.5 in/80 cm.
Automatic car washes
Information
ATTENTION
Improper use of automatic vehicle
washes can cause damage to the vehicle.
There is a risk of damage to property. Informa‐
tion the following instructions:
▷ Give preference to cloth vehicle washes or
those that use soft brushes in order to
avoid paint damage.
▷ Avoid vehicle washes with guide rails
higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid damage to
the chassis.
▷ Observe the tire width of the guide rail to
avoid damage to tires and rims.
▷ Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage to
the exterior mirrors.
▷ Deactivate rain sensor, if necessary, to
avoid damage to the wiper system.◀
In some cases, an unintentional alarm can be
triggered by the interior motion sensor of the
alarm system. Follow the instructions on
avoiding an unintentional alarm, refer to
page 48.
If necessary, switch off automatic PDC activa‐
tion on obstacle detection, for example in car
washes, to reduce PDC false alarms.
Before driving into a car wash
In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a
car wash, take the following steps:
Steptronic transmission:
1.
Drive into the car wash.
2. Engage selector lever position N.
Seite 243
Care Mobility
243
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
3. Deactivating Automatic Hold, refer to
page 74.
4. Release the parking brake.
5. Switch the engine off.
In this way, the ignition remains switched
on, and a Check-Control message is dis‐
played.
CAUTION
Selector lever position P is automati‐
cally engaged when the ignition is
switched off. There is a risk of property
damage. Do not switch ignition off in car
washes.◀
The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside
when in selector lever position N. A signal
sounds when an attempt is made to lock the
vehicle.
To start the engine with Steptronic transmis‐
sion:
1.
Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
Pressing the Start/Stop button without step‐
ping on the brake turns the ignition off.
Selector lever position
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐
cally:
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
▷ After approx. 15 minutes.
Headlights
▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or
acidic cleansers.
▷ Soak areas that have been dirtied e. g.,
from insects, with shampoo and wash off
with water.
▷ Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an
ice scraper.
After washing the vehicle
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action
can be reduced and corrosion of the brake
discs can occur.
Completely remove all residues on the win‐
dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to
smearing and to reduce wiper noises and
wiper blade wear.
Vehicle care
Vehicle care products
BMW recommends using vehicle care and
cleaning products from BMW.
WARNING
Cleansers can contain substances that
are dangerous and harmful to your health.
There is a risk of injury. When cleaning the in‐
terior, open the doors or windows. Only use
products intended for cleaning vehicles. Fol‐
low the instructions on the container.◀
Vehicle paint
Regular care contributes to driving safety and
value retention. Environmental influences in
areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐
fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐
quency and extent of your vehicle care to
these influences.
Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil,
grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐
mediately to prevent the finish from being al‐
tered or discolored.
Leather care
Remove dust from the leather often, using a
cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
Seite 244
Mobility Care
244
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
wear and premature degradation of the leather
surface.
To guard against discoloration, such as from
clothing, clean leather and provide leather care
roughly every two months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐
cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially
more visible.
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
grease will gradually break down the protective
layer of the leather surface.
Suitable care products are available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Upholstery material care
Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner.
If upholstery is very dirty, for example, with
beverage stains, use a soft sponge or micro‐
fiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the
material vigorously.
ATTENTION
Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of
clothing can damage the seat covers. There is
a risk of damage to property. Ensure that any
Velcro® fasteners are closed.◀
Caring for special components
Light-alloy wheels
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral
wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9.
Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam
jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐
turer's instructions.
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents
can destroy the protective layer of adjacent
components, such as the brake disk.
Chrome surfaces
Carefully clean components such as the radia‐
tor grille or door handles with an ample supply
of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐
ularly when they have been exposed to road
salt.
Rubber components
Environmental influences can cause surface
soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. For
cleaning, use only water and suitable care
products, the manufacturer of your vehicle rec‐
ommends original BMW care products.
Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber
care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning
rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing
vehicle care products in order to avoid damage
or noises.
Fine wood parts
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a
soft cloth.
Plastic components
ATTENTION
Cleansers that contain alcohol or sol‐
vents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty
grease removers, fuel, or such, can damage
plastic parts. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Dampen
cloth lightly with water.◀
Plastic components are e. g:
▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
▷ Roofliner.
▷ Lamp lenses.
▷ Instrument cluster cover.
▷ Matt black spray-coated components.
▷ Painted parts in the interior.
Seite 245
Care Mobility
245
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Safety belts
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
WARNING
Chemical cleansers can destroy the
safety belt webbing. Missing protective effect
of the safety belts. There is a risk of injury or
danger to life. Use only a mild soapy solution
for cleaning the safety belts.◀
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety
belts clipped into their buckles.
Do not allow the switchs to retract the safety
belts until they are dry.
Carpets and floor mats
WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is risk of an accident. Stow objects in
the vehicle such that they are secured and
cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use
floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and
can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
are securely fastened again after they were re‐
moved, e.g., for cleaning.◀
Floor mats can be removed from the car's inte‐
rior for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a
microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner.
To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and
forth in the direction of travel only.
Sensor/camera lenses
To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a
cloth moistened with a small amount of glass
detergent.
Displays/Screens/protective glass of
the Head-up Display
ATTENTION
Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of
any kind can damage the surface of displays
and screens. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber
cloth.◀
ATTENTION
The surface of displays can be damaged
with improper cleaning. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Avoid pressure that is too high
and do not use any scratching materials.◀
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.
Head-up Display:
Clean the protective glass of the Head-up Dis‐
play using a microfiber cloth and commercially
available dish-washing soap.
Long-term vehicle storage
When the vehicle is shut down for longer than
three months, special measures must be
taken. Further information is available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Seite 246
Mobility Care
246
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Seite 247
Care Mobility
247
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Reference
This chapter contains the technical data and an
index that will quickly take you to the information
you need.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Technical data
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Information
The technical data and specifications in this
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values.
The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this,
for example, due to the selected special equip‐
ment, country version or country-specific
measurement method. Detailed values can be
found in the approval documents, on labels on
the vehicle or can be obtained from a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
The information in the vehicle documents al‐
ways has priority over the information in this
Owner's Manual.
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the
model version, equipment or country-specific
measurement method.
The specified heights do not take into account
attached parts, for example, a roof antenna,
roof racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate,
for example, due to the selected special equip‐
ment, tires, load and chassis version.
BMW X3
Width with mirrors inches/mm 82.2/2,089
Width without mirrors inches/mm 74.1/1,881
Height inches/mm 66.1-66.1/1,678-1,679
Length inches/mm 183.6/4,663
Wheelbase inches/mm 110.6/2,810
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 39.1/11.9
Seite 250
Reference Technical data
250
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Weights
X3 sDrive28i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,970/2,254
Load lbs/kg 910/413
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,280/1,034
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,820/1,279
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100
Cargo area capacity cu ft 27.6-63.3
Canada: cargo area capacity cu ft/l 19.4-56.4/550-1,600
X3 xDrive28i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,080/2,304
Load lbs/kg 910/413
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,400/1,089
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,820/1,279
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100
Cargo area capacity cu ft 27.6-63.3
Canada: cargo area capacity cu ft/l 19.4-56.4/550-1,600
X3 xDrive35i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,150/2,336
Load lbs/kg 910/413
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,470/1,120
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,800/1,270
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100
Cargo area capacity cu ft 27.6-63.3
Canada: cargo area capacity cu ft/l 19.4-56.4/550-1,600
Seite 251
Technical data Reference
251
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
X3 xDrive28d
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,160/2,341
Load lbs/kg 910/413
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,460/1,116
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,830/1,284
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100
Cargo area capacity cu ft 27.6-63.3
Canada: cargo area capacity cu ft/l 19.4-56.4/550-1,600
Capacities
US gal/liters Notes
Fuel tank, approx. 17.7/67.0 Fuel quality, refer to
page 200
Seite 252
Reference Technical data
252
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Appendix
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the ve‐
hicle are listed here.
Updates made after the
editorial deadline
These chapters of the printed Owner's Manual
contain updates made after the editorial dead‐
line.
▷ Storage compartments: Storage compart‐
ments in the cargo area.
Seite 253
Appendix Reference
253
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐
tem 129
ACC, Active Cruise Control
with Stop&Go function 136
Acceleration Assistant, refer
to Launch Control 82
Accessories and parts 8
Activated-charcoal filter 164
Active Blind Spot Detec‐
tion 126
Active Cruise Control with
Stop&Go function,
ACC 136
Adaptive brake lights, see
Brake force display 128
Adaptive Light Control 102
Additional information,
iDrive 23
Additives, oil 222
Adjustments, seats/head re‐
straints 53
After washing vehicle 244
Airbags 105
Airbags, indicator/warning
light 106
Air circulation, see Recircu‐
lated-air mode 160, 163
Air, dehumidifying, see Cool‐
ing function 160, 163
Air distribution, man‐
ual 161, 164
Air flow, automatic climate
control 161, 164
Air pressure, tires 205
Air vents, see Ventilation 165
Alarm system 47
Alarm, unintentional 48
All around the center con‐
sole 16
All around the roofliner 17
All around the steering
wheel 14
All-season tires, see Winter
tires 211
All-wheel-drive 131
Alternating-code hand-held
transmitter 168
Alternative oil types 222
Ambient light 104
Antifreeze, washer fluid 78
Antilock Brake System,
ABS 129
Anti-slip control, see
DSC 129
App, BMW Driver’s Guide 6
Approved axle load 251
Armrest, see Center arm‐
rest 177
Arrival time 95
Ash tray 169
Assistance, Roadside Assis‐
tance 238
Assistance when driving
off 135
Assist system, see Intelligent
Safety 114
AUTO H button 73
AUTO H button, see Auto‐
matic Hold 73
AUTO intensity 163
Automatic car wash 243
Automatic climate con‐
trol 159
Automatic cruise control with
Stop&Go function 136
Automatic Curb Monitor 61
Automatic deactivation,
Front-seat passenger air‐
bags 107
Automatic headlamp con‐
trol 101
Automatic Hold 73
Automatic locking 46
Automatic recirculated-air
control 163
Automatic tailgate 41
Automatic transmission, see
Steptronic transmission 79
AUTO program, automatic cli‐
mate control 163
AUTO program, climate con‐
trol 160
AUTO program, intensity 163
Auto Start/Stop function 70
AUX-IN port, general informa‐
tion 171
Average fuel consumption 94
Average speed 94
Axle loads, weights 251
B
Backrest curvature, see Lum‐
bar support 55
Backrest, width 56
Bad road trips 182
Band-aids, see First-aid
kit 238
Battery replacement, vehicle
battery 235
Battery replacement, vehicle
remote control 35
Battery, vehicle 235
Being towed, see Tow-start‐
ing and towing 240
Belts, safety belts 56
Beverage holder, cup
holder 177
Biodiesel 201
Blinds, sun protection 50
Seite 254
Reference Everything from A to Z
254
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
BMW Advanced Diesel 202
BMW Assist, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation
BMW Driver’s Guide app 6
BMW Homepage 6
BMW Internet page 6
BMW maintenance sys‐
tem 226
Bonus range, ECO PRO 191
Bottle holder, see Cup
holder 177
Brake assistant 129
Brake discs, break-in 182
Brake force display 128
Brake lights, adaptive 128
Brake lights, brake force dis‐
play 128
Brake pads, break-in 182
Braking, information 184
Breakdown assis‐
tance 237, 238
Break-in 182
Brightness of Control Dis‐
play 97
Bulb replacement 229
Bulb replacement, front 230
Bulb replacement, rear 233
Bulbs and lights 229
Button, RES 139
Button, Start/Stop 68
Bypassing, see Jump-start‐
ing 238
C
California Proposition 65
Warning 8
Calling up mirror adjust‐
ment 47
Calling up seat adjust‐
ment 47
Camera lenses, care 246
Camera, rearview cam‐
era 148
Camera, Side View 153
Camera, Top View 151
Can holder, see Cup
holder 177
Car battery 235
Care, displays 246
Care, vehicle 244
Cargo 186
Cargo area 173
Cargo area, enlarging 173
Cargo area partition net 174
Cargo area, storage compart‐
ments 178
Cargo cover 173
Cargo straps, securing
cargo 187
Car key, see Remote con‐
trol 34
Carpet, care 246
Car wash 243
Catalytic converter, see Hot
exhaust system 183
CBS Condition Based Serv‐
ice 226
CD/Multimedia, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation
Center armrest 177
Center console 16
Central locking system 40
Central screen, see Control
Display 18
Changes, technical, see Own
Safety 7
Changing parts 228
Changing wheels 235
Changing wheels/tires 210
Chassis number, see Vehicle
identification number 10
Check Control 85
Checking the oil level elec‐
tronically 220
Children, seating position 64
Children, transporting
safely 64
Child restraint fixing system
LATCH 66
Child restraint system 64
Child restraint systems,
mounting 65
Child safety locks 67
Child seat, mounting 65
Child seats 64
Chrome parts, care 245
Cigarette lighter 169
Cleaning displays 246
Climate control 159, 162
Clock 89
Closing/opening via door
lock 39
Closing/opening with remote
control 38
Closing the tailgate with no-
touch activation 44
Clothes hooks 178
Coasting 193
Coasting with engine decou‐
pled, coasting 193
Coasting with idling en‐
gine 193
Cockpit 14
Cold starting, see Starting the
engine 69
Combination switch, see Turn
signals 75
Combination switch, see
Wiper system 75
Comfort Access 43
COMFORT program, Dy‐
namic Driving Control 134
Compartments in the
doors 177
Compass 95
Compressor 212
Condensation on win‐
dows 161, 164
Condensation under the vehi‐
cle 185
Condition Based Service
CBS 226
Seite 255
Everything from A to Z Reference
255
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Configuring driving pro‐
gram 134
Confirmation signal 46
ConnectedDrive, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation
ConnectedDrive Services
Connecting electrical devi‐
ces 170
Container for washer fluid 78
Continued driving with a flat
tire 111, 114
Control Display 18
Control Display, settings 96
Controller 19
Control systems, driving sta‐
bility 129
Convenient opening with the
remote control 38
Coolant 224
Coolant temperature 89
Cooling function 160, 163
Cooling, maximum 163
Cooling system 224
Cornering light 102
Corrosion on brake discs 185
Cosmetic mirror 169
Courtesy lamps during un‐
locking 38
Courtesy lamps with the vehi‐
cle locked 38
Cruise control 142
Cruise control, active with
Stop&Go function 136
Cruise control with distance
control, see active cruise
control, ACC 136
Cruise control without dis‐
tance control, see cruise
control 142
Cruising range 90
Cup holder 177
Current fuel consumption 90
D
Damage, tires 210
Damping control, dy‐
namic 132
Data, technical 250
Date 90
Daytime running lights 102
Daytime running lights, bulb
replacement 230
Defrosting, see Windows, de‐
frosting 161, 164
Dehumidifying, air 160, 163
Deleting personal data 25
Deletion of personal data 25
Destination distance 95
Diesel exhaust fluid, at low
temperatures 202
Diesel exhaust fluid, having
refilled 202
Diesel exhaust fluid, on mini‐
mum 202
Diesel exhaust fluid, replen‐
ishing yourself 202
Diesel fuel 201
Diesel particulate filter 183
Digital clock 89
Dimensions 250
Dimmable exterior mirrors 62
Dimmable interior mirror 62
Direction indicator, see Turn
signals 75
Display, electronic, instru‐
ment cluster 84
Display in windshield 98
Display lighting, see Instru‐
ment lighting 104
Displays, cleaning 246
Disposal, coolant 225
Disposal, vehicle battery 236
Distance control, see
PDC 145
Distance to destination 95
Divided screen view, split
screen 24
Door lock 39
Door lock, see Remote con‐
trol 34
Downhill control 131
Drive-off assistant 135
Drive-off assistant, see
DSC 129
Driving Dynamics Con‐
trol 133
Driving instructions, break-
in 182
Driving mode 133
Driving notes, general 183
Driving on bad roads 182
Driving on racetracks 185
Driving stability control sys‐
tems 129
Driving tips 183
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 129
DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
trol 130
Dynamic Damping Con‐
trol 132
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 129
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC 130
E
ECO PRO 190
ECO PRO, bonus range 191
ECO PRO display 190
ECO PRO driving mode 190
ECO PRO mode 190
ECO PRO Tip - driving in‐
struction 192
EfficientDynamics 192
Electronic displays, instru‐
ment cluster 84
Electronic oil measure‐
ment 220
Electronic Stability Program
ESP, see DSC 129
Emergency detection, remote
control 35
Seite 256
Reference Everything from A to Z
256
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Emergency Request 237
Emergency service, see
Roadside Assistance 238
Emergency start function, en‐
gine start 35
Emergency unlocking, trans‐
mission lock 82
Energy Control 90
Energy recovery 90
Engine, automatic Start/Stop
function 70
Engine, automatic switch-
off 70
Engine compartment 217
Engine compartment, work‐
ing in 217
Engine coolant 224
Engine idling when driving,
coasting 193
Engine oil 220
Engine oil, adding 221
Engine oil additives 222
Engine oil change 223
Engine oil filler neck 221
Engine oil temperature 89
Engine oil types, alterna‐
tive 222
Engine oil types, suitable 222
Engine start during malfunc‐
tion 35
Engine start, jump-start‐
ing 238
Engine start, see Starting the
engine 69
Engine stop 69
Engine temperature 89
Entering a car wash 243
Equipment, interior 167
Error displays, see Check
Control 85
ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐
gram, see DSC 129
Exchanging wheels/tires 210
Exhaust system 183
Exterior mirror, automatic
dimming feature 62
Exterior mirrors 61
External start 238
External temperature dis‐
play 89
External temperature warn‐
ing 89
Eyes for securing cargo 187
F
Failure message, see Check
Control 85
False alarm, see Unintentional
alarm 48
Fan, see Air flow 161, 164
Filler neck for engine oil 221
Fine wood, care 245
First-aid kit 238
Flat tire, changing
wheels 235
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 112
Flat tire, repairing 212
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 108
Flat tire, warning
lamp 110, 113
Flooding 184
Floor carpet, care 246
Floor mats, care 246
Fold-away position, wiper 78
Folding back rear seat backr‐
ests 173
Foot brake 184
Front airbags 105
Front-end collision warning
with braking function 118
Front-end collision warning
with City Braking func‐
tion 115
Front fog lamps, , LED, bulb
replacement 232
Front fog lights 103
Front fog lights, front, bulb re‐
placement 232
Front lights 230
Front-seat passenger airbags,
automatic deactivation 107
Front-seat passenger airbags,
indicator lamp 107
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 112
Fuel 200
Fuel cap 198
Fuel consumption, see Aver‐
age fuel consumption 94
Fuel filler flap 198
Fuel gauge 89
Fuel quality 200
Fuel recommendation 200
Fuel, tank capacity 252
Fuse 236
G
Garage door opener, see Uni‐
versal Integrated Remote
Control 167
Gasoline 200
Gear change, Steptronic
transmission 80
Gear shift indicator 91
General driving notes 183
Glare shield 169
Glass sunroof, refer to Panor‐
amic glass sunroof 50
Glove compartment 176
GPS location, vehicle posi‐
tion 97
Gross vehicle weight, ap‐
proved 251
H
Halogen headlights, bulb re‐
placement 230
Handbrake, see Parking
brake 72
Hand-held transmitter, alter‐
nating code 168
Hazard warning flashers 237
HDC Hill Descent Con‐
trol 131
Seite 257
Everything from A to Z Reference
257
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Head airbags 105
Headlamp control, auto‐
matic 101
Headlight courtesy delay fea‐
ture 101
Headlight courtesy delay fea‐
ture via remote control 39
Headlight flasher 75
Headlight flasher, bulb re‐
placement 230
Headlight glass 229
Headlights 230
Headlights, care 244
Head restraints 53
Head restraints, front 58
Head restraints, rear 59
Head-up Display 98
Head-up Display, care 246
Heavy cargo, stowing 187
High-beam Assistant 102
High beams 75
High beams/low beams, see
High-beam Assistant 102
High beams, bulb replace‐
ment 230
Hill Descent Control
HDC 131
Hills 185
Hill start assistant, see Drive-
off assistant 135
Holder for beverages 177
Homepage 6
Hood 217
Horn 14
Hot exhaust system 183
HUD Head-up Display 98
Hydroplaning 184
I
Ice warning, see External
temperature warning 89
Icy roads, see External tem‐
perature warning 89
Identification marks, tires 208
Identification number, see Ve‐
hicle identification num‐
ber 10
iDrive 18
Ignition key, see Remote con‐
trol 34
Ignition off 68
Ignition on 68
Indication of a flat
tire 110, 113
Indicator and alarm lamps,
see Check Control 85
Indicator lamp, see Check
Control 85
Individual air distribu‐
tion 161, 164
Individual settings, see Per‐
sonal Profile 36
Inflation pressure, tires 205
Inflation pressure warning,
tires 112
Info display, see On-Board
computer 94
Information 6
Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 109
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 113
Instrument cluster 84
Instrument cluster, electronic
displays 84
Instrument lighting 104
Integrated key 34
Integrated Owner's Manual in
the vehicle 30
Intelligent emergency
call 237
Intelligent Safety 114
Intensity, AUTO pro‐
gram 163
Interior equipment 167
Interior lights 104
Interior lights during unlock‐
ing 38
Interior lights with the vehicle
locked 38
Interior mirror, automatic dim‐
ming feature 62
Interior mirror, manually dim‐
mable 62
Interior motion sensor 48
Internet page 6
Interval display, service re‐
quirements 91
Interval mode 76
J
Jacking points for the vehicle
jack 235
Joystick, Steptronic transmis‐
sion 80
Jump-starting 238
K
Key/remote control 34
Keyless Go, see Comfort Ac‐
cess 43
Key Memory, see Personal
Profile 36
Kickdown, Steptronic trans‐
mission 79
Knee airbag 106
L
Label on recommended
tires 211
Lamp in the exterior mirror,
see Active Blind Spot De‐
tection 126
Lamp replacement 229
Lamp replacement, front 230
Lamp replacement, rear 233
Lane departure warning 124
Lane margin, warning 124
Language on Control Dis‐
play 97
Lashing eyes, securing
cargo 187
Seite 258
Reference Everything from A to Z
258
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
LATCH child restraint fixing
system 66
Launch Control 82
Leather, care 244
LEDs, light-emitting di‐
odes 229
Letters and numbers, enter‐
ing 25
Light 100
Light-alloy wheels, care 245
Light control 102
Light-emitting diodes,
LEDs 229
Lighter 169
Lighting 100
Lights and bulbs 229
Light switch 100
Load 187
Loading 186
Lock, door 39
Locking/unlocking via door
lock 39
Locking/unlocking with re‐
mote control 38
Locking, automatic 46
Locking, settings 46
Lock, power window 50
Locks, doors, and win‐
dows 67
Low beams 100
Low beams, automatic, see
High-beam Assistant 102
Lower back support 55
Low-Sulfur Diesel 201
Luggage rack, see Roof-
mounted luggage rack 188
Lumbar support 55
M
Maintenance 226
Maintenance require‐
ments 226
Maintenance, service require‐
ments 91
Maintenance system,
BMW 226
Make-up mirror 169
Malfunction displays, see
Check Control 85
Manual air distribu‐
tion 161, 164
Manual air flow 161, 164
Manual brake, see Parking
brake 72
Manual mode, Steptronic
transmission 80
Manual operation, door
lock 39
Manual operation, exterior
mirrors 61
Manual operation, Park Dis‐
tance Control PDC 146
Manual operation, rearview
camera 148
Manual operation, Top
View 151
Marking, run-flat tires 212
Master key, see Remote con‐
trol 34
Maximum cooling 163
Maximum speed, display 92
Maximum speed, winter
tires 211
Measurement, units of 97
Medical kit 238
Memory, seat, mirror 60
Menu, EfficientDynamics 192
Menu in instrument clus‐
ter 93
Menus, operating, iDrive 18
Menus, see iDrive operating
concept 20
Messages, see Check Con‐
trol 85
Microfilter 161, 164
Minimum tread, tires 210
Mirror 61
Mirror memory 60
Mobile communication devi‐
ces in the vehicle 184
Mobility System 212
Modifications, technical, see
Own Safety 7
Moisture in headlight 229
Monitor, see Control Dis‐
play 18
Mounting of child restraint
systems 65
Moving sun visor 169
Multifunction steering wheel,
buttons 14
N
Navigation, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation
Neck restraints, front, see
Head restraints 58
Neck restraints, rear, see
Head restraints 59
Neutral cleaner, see wheel
cleaner 245
New wheels and tires 210
O
OBD Onboard Diagnosis 227
OBD, see OBD Onboard Di‐
agnosis 227
Obstacle marking, rearview
camera 149
Octane rating, see Recom‐
mended fuel grade 201
Odometer 89
Office, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment and Communication
Offroad trips 182
Oil 220
Oil, adding 221
Oil additives 222
Oil change 223
Oil change interval, service
requirements 91
Seite 259
Everything from A to Z Reference
259
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Oil filler neck 221
Oil types, alternative 222
Oil types, suitable 222
Old batteries, disposal 236
Onboard computer 94
Onboard computer, see On‐
board computer 94
Onboard monitor, see Control
Display 18
Onboard vehicle tool kit 228
Opening/closing via door
lock 39
Opening and closing 34
Opening and closing, without
remote control 39
Opening and closing, with re‐
mote control 38
Opening the tailgate with no-
touch activation 44
Operating concept, iDrive 18
Optional equipment 7
Outside air, see Automatic re‐
circulated-air control 163
Overheating of engine, see
Coolant temperature 89
Own Safety 7
P
Paint, vehicle 244
Panoramic glass sunroof 50
Parallel parking assistant 154
Park Distance Control
PDC 145
Parked-car ventilation 165
Parked vehicle, condensa‐
tion 185
Parking aid, see PDC 145
Parking assistant 154
Parking brake 72
Parking lights 100
Parking lights, bulb replace‐
ment 230
Parking with Automatic
Hold 73
Particulate filter 183
Parts and accessories 8
Passenger side mirror, tilting
downward 61
Pathway lines, rearview cam‐
era 149
PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol 145
Performance Control 131
Personal Profile 36
Personal Profile, exporting
profiles 37
Personal Profile, importing
profiles 37
Person warning with City light
braking function 121
Pinch protection system,
glass sunroof 52
Pinch protection system, win‐
dows 49
Plastic, care 245
Power failure 236
Power windows 48
Prescribed engine oil
types 222
Pressure, tire air pres‐
sure 205
Pressure warning, tires 112
Profile, see Personal Pro‐
file 36
Programmable memory but‐
tons, iDrive 24
Protective function, glass
sunroof 52
Protective function, win‐
dows 49
Push-and-turn switch, see
Controller 19
R
Racetrack operation 185
Radiator fluid 224
Radio-operated key, see Re‐
mote control 34
Radio ready state 68
Radio, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment and Communication
Rain sensor 76
Rapeseed-oil methyl ester
RME 201
Ratchet straps, securing
cargo 187
Rear lights 233
Rear socket 171
Rearview camera 148
Rearview mirror 61
Rear window de‐
froster 161, 164
Recirculated-air filter 164
Recirculated-air
mode 160, 163
Recommended fuel
grade 201
Recommended tire
brands 211
Refueling 198
Remaining range 90
Remote control/key 34
Remote control, malfunc‐
tion 39
Remote control, univer‐
sal 167
Replacement fuse 236
Replacing parts 228
Replacing wheels/tires 210
Reporting safety malfunc‐
tions 10
RES button 139
RES button, see Active
Cruise Control, ACC 136
RES button, see Cruise con‐
trol 142
Reserve warning, see
Range 90
Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 109
Retreaded tires 211
RME rapeseed-oil methyl es‐
ter 201
Roadside parking lights 100
Seite 260
Reference Everything from A to Z
260
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Roller sunblinds 50
RON recommended fuel
grade 201
Roofliner 17
Roof load capacity 251
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 188
RSC Run Flat System Com‐
ponent, see Run-flat
tires 212
Rubber components,
care 245
Run-flat tires 212
S
Safe braking 184
Safety belt reminder for driv‐
er's seat and front passen‐
ger seat 58
Safety belts 56
Safety belts, care 246
Safety switch, windows 50
Safety systems, airbags 105
Saving fuel 189
Screen, see Control Dis‐
play 18
Screwdriver, see Onboard ve‐
hicle tool kit 228
Sealant 212
Seat and mirror memory 60
Seat belts, see Safety
belts 56
Seat heating, front 56
Seat heating, rear 56
Seating position for chil‐
dren 64
Seats 53
Securing cargo 187
Selection list in instrument
cluster 93
Selector lever, Steptronic
transmission 80
Sensors, care 246
Service and warranty 8
Service requirements, Condi‐
tion Based Service
CBS 226
Service requirements, dis‐
play 91
Service, Roadside Assis‐
tance 238
Services, ConnectedDrive
Servotronic 133
SET button, see Active
Cruise Control, ACC 136
SET button, see Cruise con‐
trol 142
Settings, locking/unlock‐
ing 46
Settings on Control Dis‐
play 96
Settings, storing for seat, mir‐
ror 60
Shift paddles on the steering
wheel 81
Side airbags 105
Side View 152
Signaling, horn 14
Signals when unlocking 46
Sitting safely 53
Size 250
Ski and snowboard bag 175
Slide/tilt glass roof 50
Snow chains 215
Socket 170
Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐
nostics 227
Soot particulate filter 183
SOS button 237
Spare fuse 236
Speed, average 94
Speed limit detection 92
Speed limit detection, com‐
puter 95
Speed limits, display 92
Speed warning 96
Split screen 24
SPORT+ - program, Dynamic
Driving Control 133
Sport displays, torque dis‐
play, performance dis‐
play 95
SPORT program, Dynamic
Driving Control 134
Sport program, transmis‐
sion 80
Sport steering, variable 132
Stability control systems 129
Standard equipment 7
Start/stop, automatic func‐
tion 70
Start/Stop button 68
Start function during malfunc‐
tion 35
Starting the engine 69
Status control display,
tires 109
Status of Owner's Manual 7
Steering assistance 133
Steering wheel, adjusting 62
Steering wheel heating 63
Steptronic Sport transmis‐
sion, see Steptronic trans‐
mission 79
Steptronic transmission 79
Stopping the engine 69
Storage compartments 176
Storage compartments, loca‐
tions 176
Storage, tires 212
Storing the vehicle 246
Suitable engine oil types 222
Summer tires, tread 210
Sun visor 169
Supplementary text mes‐
sages 88
Surround View 147
Switch for Dynamic Driv‐
ing 133
Switch-on times, parked-car
ventilation 166
Switch, see Cockpit 14
Symbols 6
Symbols in the status field 23
Seite 261
Everything from A to Z Reference
261
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
SYNC program, automatic cli‐
mate control 164
T
Tachometer 89
Tailgate, automatic 41
Tailgate closing 41
Tailgate, closing with no-
touch activation 44
Tailgate opening 41
Tailgate, opening with no-
touch activation 44
Tailgate via remote con‐
trol 38
Tail lamps 233
Technical changes, see Own
Safety 7
Technical data 250
Telephone, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation
Temperature, automatic cli‐
mate control 160, 162
Temperature display for ex‐
ternal temperature 89
Temperature, engine oil 89
Terminal, starting aid 239
Text messages, supplemen‐
tary 88
Theft alarm system, see
Alarm system 47
Thigh support 55
Tilt alarm sensor 48
Time of arrival 95
Tire damage 210
Tire identification marks 208
Tire inflation pressure 205
Tire inflation pressure moni‐
tor, see FTM 112
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 108
Tire repair kit, see Mobility
System 212
Tires, changing 210
Tire sealant, see Mobility
System 212
Tires, everything on wheels
and tires 205
Tires, run-flat tires 212
Tire tread 210
Tone, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication
Tool 228
Top View 150
Total vehicle weight 251
Touchpad 21
Towing 240
Tow-starting 240
TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor 108
Traction control 130
TRACTION, driving dynam‐
ics 130
Transmission lock, electronic
unlocking 82
Transmission, Steptronic
transmission 79
Transporting children
safely 64
Tread, tires 210
Triple turn signal activa‐
tion 75
Trip odometer 89
Trip onboard computer 95
Trip recorder, see Trip odom‐
eter 89
Turning circle lines, rearview
camera 149
Turn signals, operation 75
U
Unintentional alarm 48
Units of measurement 97
Universal remote control 167
Unlock button, Steptronic
transmission 80
Unlocking/locking via door
lock 39
Unlocking/locking with re‐
mote control 38
Unlocking, settings 46
Unpaved roads, cross-coun‐
try trips 182
Updates made after the edito‐
rial deadline 7
Upholstery care 245
USB interface, general infor‐
mation 171
USB port, see USB inter‐
face 171
V
Vanity mirror 169
Variable sport steering 132
Vehicle battery 235
Vehicle battery, replac‐
ing 235
Vehicle, break-in 182
Vehicle care 244
Vehicle care products 244
Vehicle features and op‐
tions 7
Vehicle identification num‐
ber 10
Vehicle jack 235
Vehicle paint 244
Vehicle position, GPS loca‐
tion 97
Vehicle storage 246
Vehicle wash 243
Ventilation 165
Ventilation, see Parked-car
ventilation 165
VIN, see Vehicle identification
number 10
Voice activation system 27
W
Warning and indicator lamps,
see Check Control 85
Warning displays, see Check
Control 85
Seite 262
Reference Everything from A to Z
262
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
Warning lamp in the exterior
mirror, see Active Blind Spot
Detection 126
Warning messages, see
Check Control 85
Warning triangle 238
Warranty 7
Washer fluid 78
Washer nozzles, wind‐
shield 77
Washer system 75
Washing, vehicle 243
Water on roads 184
Weights 251
Welcome lamps during un‐
locking 38
Welcome lights 101
Wheel cleaner 245
Wheels, changing 210
Wheels, everything on wheels
and tires 205
Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 112
Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 108
Window defroster,
rear 161, 164
Windows, powered 48
Windshield washer fluid 78
Windshield washer noz‐
zles 77
Windshield washer sys‐
tem 75
Windshield washer system,
see washer/wiper sys‐
tem 75
Windshield wiper, see wiper
system 75
Winter storage, care 246
Winter tires, suitable
tires 211
Winter tires, tread 210
Wiper 75
Wiper blades, replacing 228
Wiper fluid 78
Wiper, fold-away position 78
Wiper system 75
Wood, care 245
Word match concept, naviga‐
tion 26
Wrench, see Onboard vehicle
tool kit 228
X
xDrive 131
Xenon headlights, bulb re‐
placement 231
Seite 263
Everything from A to Z Reference
263
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
More about BMW
bmwusa.com
The Ultimate
Driving Machine®
01 40 2 969 976 ue
*BL2969976004*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 969 976 - II/16
